IX CHANGE 


i 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


Agrats 
THE  CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

LONDON  AND  EDINBURGH 

THE  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 

TOKYO,  OSAKA,  KYOTO 

KARL  W.  HIERSEMANN 

LEIPZIG 

THE  BAKER  &  TAYLOR  COMPANY 

NEW  YORK 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE 


A  COMPILATION  OF 

TYPOGRAPHICAL    RULES    GOVERNING   THE    PUBLICATIONS    OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO,  WITH  SPECIMENS  OF 

TYPES  USED  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 


FOURTH  EDITION 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


COPYRIGHT  1906, 1910,  1911,  AND  1914  BY 
THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


All  Rights  Reserved 


Published  November  1006 

Second  Edition  March  1910 

Third  Edition  December  1911 

Second  Impression  August  1912 

Fourth  Edition  February  1914 


Composed  and  Printed  By 

The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

Chicago,  Illinois,  U.S.A. 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

The  present  work  is  a  codification  of  the  typographical 
rules  employed  by  the  University  of  Chicago  in  connection 
with  its  official  printing  and  publications  issued  through 
the  University  Press.  Having  its  genesis,  nearly  two 
decades  ago,  in  a  single  sheet  of  fundamentals,  jotted 
down  by  the  first  proofreader  at  odd  moments  for  his 
own  guidance;  added  to  from  year  to  year,  as  oppor- 
tunity offered  or  new  necessities  arose;  revised  and 
re-revised  as  the  scope  of  the  work,  and,  it  is  hoped,  the 
wisdom  of  the  workers,  increased — it  emerges  in  its  present 
form  as  the  embodiment  of  traditions,  the  crystallization 
of  usages,  the  blended  product  of  the  reflections  of  many 
minds. 

Regulations  like  these,  in  the  nature  of  the  case, 
cannot  be  endowed  with  the  fixity  of  unchanging  law. 
They  are  meant  for  the  average  case,  and  must  be 
applied  with  a  certain  degree  of  elasticity.  Exceptions 
will  constantly  occur,  and  ample  room  is  left  for  individual 
initiative  and  discretion.  They  point  the  way  and  survey 
the  road,  rather  than  remove  the  obstacles.  Throughout 
this  book  it  is  assumed  that  no  regulation  contained  therein 
is  absolutely  inviolable.  Wherever  the  peculiar  nature  of 
the  subject-matter,  the  desirability  of  throwing  into  relief 
a  certain  part  of  the  argument,  the  reasonable  preference 


vi  INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

of  a  writer,  or  a  typographical  contingency  suggests  a 
deviation,  such  deviation  may  legitimately  be  made.  Each 
case  of  this  character  must  be  decided  largely  upon  its 
own  merits.  Generally  it  may  be  stated  that,  where  no 
question  of  taste  or  logic  is  involved,  deference  should 
be  shown  to  the  expressed  wishes  of  the  author. 

The  nature  of  the  work  of  the  Press  itself — and  this 
will  apply,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  to  any  similar  in- 
stitution affected  by  local  conditions — constantly  calls  for 
modification,  now  of  this  rule,  now  of  that.  It  would  be 
found  impracticable,  even  were  it  desirable,  to  bring  all 
its  publications  into  rigid  uniformity  of  "  style "  and 
appearance.  Methods  have  been  devised,  systems  evolved, 
in  certain  lines  of  work,  which  cannot  be  carried  bodily 
over  into  the  field  of  others.  Thus,  in  the  matter  of  literary 
references,  for  instance,  general  practice  has  established 
certain  usages  in  some  of  the  sciences  which  it  would  not 
be  advisable  to  ignore.  Similar  differences  in  practice 
may  be  observed  in  other  directions.  These  deviations 
from  the  general  rules  will  be  found  mentioned  at  the 
appropriate  places  in  the  body  of  the  book.  On  the  whole, 
however,  the  rules  are  designed  to  govern  all  publications 
sent  forth  with  the  official  publishing  imprint,  "The 
University  of  Chicago  Press." 

Concerning  the  character  and  contents  of  the  book 
little  need  be  added.  Its  origin,  its  primary  aim,  and  its 
limitations,  as  outlined  above,  will  suggest  the  bounds  of 
its  usefulness.  It  does  not  pretend  to  be  exhaustive;  a 
few  things  must  be  taken  for  granted,  and  the  traditional 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE  vn 

territory  of  the  dictionary  has  only  exceptionally  been 
invaded.  It  does  not  presume  to  be  inflexibly  consistent; 
applicability,  in  the  printing-office,  is  a  better  test  than 
iron-clad  consistency,  and  common-sense  a  safer  guide 
than  abstract  logic.  It  lays  no  claim  to  perfection  in  any 
of  its  parts;  bearing  throughout  the  inevitable  earmarks 
of  compromise,  it  will  not  carry  conviction  at  every  point 
to  everybody.  Neither  is  it  an  advocate  of  any  radical 
scheme  of  reform;  in  the  present  state  of  the  agitation 
for  changes  in  spelling,  progressive  conservatism  has 
been  thought  to  be  more  appropriate  for  an  academic 
printing-office  than  radicalism.  As  it  stands,  this  Manual 
is  believed  to  contain  a  fairly  comprehensive,  reasonably 
harmonious,  and  wholesomely  practical  set  of  work-rules 
for  the  aid  of  those  who  have  to  do  with  questions  of 
typographical  style.  For  the  benefit  of  those  whose  duties 
bring  them  into  direct  contact  with  the  manufacturing 
department  of  the  Press,  specimen  pages  of  the  available 
types,  special  characters,  etc.,  have  been  added. 

The  Manual  of  Style  is  now  in  its  fourth  edition .  That 
it  is  recognized  as  possessing  merit  is  evidenced  by  its 
adoption  and  use  in  many  editorial  offices,  libraries, 
and  proofrooms  in  the  United  States  and  Canada. 
This  edition  incorporates  several  new  rules  which  it  is 
believed  will  prove  helpful,  and  at  the  same  time  seeks 
to  elucidate  some  of  the  older  rules,  in  the  application 
of  which  difficulties  may  arise.  Changes  in  literary 
practice,  the  legislation  of  learned  societies,  the  recent 
development  of  the  profession  of  the  librarian,  with  the 


viii  INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

attendant  uniformity  of  practice  recommended  by  the 
national  association  of  librarians,  and  the  added  experi- 
ence resulting  from  a  daily  application  of  these  rules  to 
a  very  varied  list  of  publications,  are  all  factors  con- 
tributing to  the  need  of  periodical  revision. 

The  work,  thus  remodeled,  is  again  offered  to  the 
public,  in  the  hope  that  it  may  continue  to  be  useful 
to  those  whose  occupations  require  some  familiarity  with 
the  niceties  of  typographical  form. 

NEWMAN  MILLER,  Director 
THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

CHICAGO,  ILL. 
January  15,  1914 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

RULES  FOR  COMPOSITION i 

Capitalization 3 

The  Use  of  Italics 24 

Quotations 31 

Spelling 35 

Punctuation 47 

Divisions 76 

Footnotes 83 

Indexing        87 

Tabular  Work 90 

TECHNICAL  TERMS 95 

APPENDIX        in 

Hints  to  Authors  and  Editors 113 

Hints  to  Proofreaders 117 

Hints  to  Copyholders 120 

Proofreader's  Marks 123 

INDEXES 125 

Index  to  Manual 127 

Index  to  Types,  etc 141 

SPECIMENS  or  TYPES  IN  USE 143 


RULES    FOR    COMPOSITION 


CAPITALIZATION 
CAPITALIZE — 

1.  Proper  nouns  and  adjectives: 

George,  America,  North  America,  Englishman;  Elizabethan, 
French.  (See  53.) 

Do  not  capitalize  verbs  derived  from  proper  names: 
to  boycott,  to  fletcherize,  to  pasteurize; 

nor  such  words  as  the  following,  when  used  in 
the  sense  of  electrical  units: 
volt,  ampere,  watt,  henry,  ohm. 

2.  Epithets  used  as  substitutes  for  proper  names,  or 
affixed  to  a  name: 

the  Pretender,  Bloody  Mary,  Alexander  the  Great. 

3.  The  particles  in  French  names,  as  "le,"  "la,"  "de," 
"du/'  when  they  are  not  preceded  by  a  Christian 
name  or  title;    but  do  not  capitalize  them  when 
they  are  preceded  by  such  name  or  title: 

Le  Bossu,  La  Torre,  La  Rochelle,  De  Coligny,  D'Aubigne, 
Du  Maurier  (but:  Rene  le  Bossu,  Miguel  de  la  Torre, 
Gaspard  de  Coligny,  Thomas  d'Aubigne,  George  du 
Maurier) . 

Always  capitalize  "Van"  and  "Ten" in  Dutch  names; 
never  capitalize  "von"  in  German  names: 
Stephen  Van  Rensselaer;  Hugo  von  Martius,  von  Dobschiitz. 
NOTE. — Personal  preference  is  responsible  for  the  following  ex- 
ceptions: Henry  van  Dyke,  J.  H.  van't  Hoff,  Bernard  E.  C. 
ten  Brink. 

3 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Generic  terms  forming  a  part  of  geographical  names: 

Atlantic  Ocean,  Dead  Sea,  Baffin's  Bay,  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
Straits  of  Gibraltar,  Straits  Settlements,  Mississippi  River, 
Three  Rivers,  Laughing  Brook,  Rocky  Mountains,  Blue 
Hills,  Pike's  Peak,  Mount  of  Olives,  Great  Desert,  Death 
Valley,  Prince  Edward  Island,  Sea  (Lake)  of  Galilee. 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  of  this  class  when  simply 
added  by  way  of  description  to  the  specific  name, 
without  forming  an  organic  part  of  such  name: 
the  river  Elbe,  the  desert  of  Sahara,  the  island  of  Madagascar. 

Subject  to  the  above  rule,  the  following  lists  will  be 
found  useful: 


CAPITALIZE,  IN  SINGULAR  FORM  ONLY, 

WHEN  IMMEDIATELY 

FOLLOWING  NAME 

Archipelago 

Gap 

Ocean 

Borough 

Glacier 

Parish  (La.) 

Branch  (stream) 

Gulch 

Park 

Butte 

Harbor 

Plateau 

Canyon 

Head 

Range 

County 

Hffl(s) 

Reservation 

Crater 

Hollow 

Ridge 

Creek 

Island(s) 

River 

Delta 

Mesa 

Run 

Forest 

Mountain(s) 

Spring(s) 

Fork 

Narrows 

CAPITALIZE,  IN  SINGULAR  FORM,  EITHER  BEFORE  OR  AFTER 
THE  NAME;  AND  IN  PLURAL  FORM  BEFORE  THE  NAME 

Bay  Fort  Point 

Bayou  Isle  Port 

Camp  (military)  Lake  Sea 

Cape  Mount  Strait 

Dalles  Oasis  Valley 

Desert  Pass  Volcano 

Falls  Peak 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  CAPITALIZATION  5 

5.  Adjectives  and  nouns  used  singly  or  in  conjunction, 
to  distinguish  definite  regions  or  parts  of  the  world; 
and  also  terms  applied  to  groups  of  states: 

Old  World,  Western  Hemisphere,  North  Pole,  Equator, 
the  North  (= Scandinavia),  the  East  (the  Orient),  the  Far 
East,  the  Orient,  the  Levant;  the  North,  South,  East,  West 
(United  States) ;  North  Atlantic  states,  Gulf  states,  Middle 
Western  states,  Pacific  Coast  states. 

But  do  not,  as  a  rule,  capitalize  adjectives  derived 
from  such  names,  or  nouns  having  an  adjectival 
form,  or  nouns  simply  designating  direction  or 
point  of  compass,  except  as  applied  to  geographical 
sections: 

oriental  customs,  the  southern  states,  a  southerner  (but: 
Northman = Scandinavian);  an  invasion  of  barbarians 
from  the  north,  extending  through  the  south  of  Europe 
(but:  Northern  Asia,  Continental  Europe). 

6.  Generic  terms  for  political  divisions: 

(1)  when  the  term  is  an  organic  part  of  the  name, 
following  the  proper  name  directly : 

Holy  Roman  Empire,  German  Empire  (=Deutsches  Reich), 
French  Republic  (—Republique  franf aise),  United  Kingdom, 
Northwest  Territory,  Cook  County,  Evanston  Township, 
Kansas  City  (New  York  City — exception). 

(2)  when,  with  the  preposition  "of,"  it  is  used  as 
an  integral  part  of  the  name  to  indicate  certain 
minor  administrative   subdivisions   in   the  United 
States: 

Department  of  the  Lakes,  Town  of  Lake,  Borough  of  Man- 
hattan. 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

(3)  when  used  singly  as  the  accepted  designation 
for  a  specific  division : 

the  Union,  the  States,  the  Republic  (= United  States),  [the 
Confederacy],  the  Dominion  (= Canada). 

(4)  when  it  is  part  of  a  fanciful  or  popular  appel- 
lation used  as  if  a  real  geographical  name : 

Celestial  Empire,  Holy  (Promised)  Land,  Badger  State, 
Eternal  City,  Garden  City. 

But  do  not  (with  the  exceptions  noted)  capitalize  such 
terms  when  standing  alone,  or  when,  with  "of," 
preceding  the  specific  name: 

the  empire,  the  state;  empire  of  Russia,  kingdom  of  Bel- 
gium, [kingdom  of  God,  or  of  heaven],  duchy  of  Anhalt, 
state  of  Illinois,  county  of  Cook,  city  of  Chicago. 

7.  Numbered  political  divisions  (see  100): 

Eleventh  Congressional  District,  First  Ward,  Second  Precinct. 

8.  The  names  of  thoroughfares,  parks,  squares,  blocks, 
buildings,  etc.  (see  100): 

Drexel  Avenue,  Ringstrasse,  Via  Appia,  Chicago  Drainage 
Canal;  Lincoln  Park;  Trafalgar  Square;  Monadnock 
Block;  Lakeside  Building,  Capitol,  White  House,  County 
Hospital,  Theatre  Frangais,  Lexington  Hotel,  Masonic 
Temple  [Solomon's  temple,  but,  when  standing  alone:  the 
Temple]. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general  designations  of 
buildings  as  "courthouse,"  "post-office,"  "library," 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  7 

etc.,  except  in  connection  with  the  name  of  the  place 
in  which  they  are  located. 

9.  The  names  of  political  parties,  religious  denomina- 
tions or  sects,  and  philosophical,  literary,  and  artistic 
schools,  and  their  adherents: 

Republican,  Conservative,  National  Liberal,  Social  Democ- 
racy (where,  as  in  Continental  Europe,  it  is  organized  as 
a  distinct  parliamentary  faction);  Christian,  Protestantism, 
Evangelical  Lutheran,  Catholic  (Papist,  Ultramontane),  Re- 
formed, Greek  Orthodox,  Seventh-Day  Adventists,  the 
Establishment,  High  Church,  High  Churchman,  Separatist, 
Nonconformist,  Dissenter,  Theosophist,  Jew,  Pharisee 
(but:  scribe)  (adjective:  Pharisaic,  but:  pharisaic,  when 
used  of  characteristics,  and  not  of  the  sect  itself);  Epi- 
curean Stoic,  Gnosticism  (but:  neo-Platonism,  pseudo- 
Christianity,  un-Christian — see  203,  208),  Literalist;  the 
Romantic  movement,  the  Symbolic  school  of  painters. 

But  do  not  capitalize  any  of  the  above  or  similar 
words,  or  their  derivatives,  when  used  in  their  origi- 
nal or  acquired  general  sense  of  pervading  spirit, 
point  of  view,  trend  of  thought,  attitude  of  mind,  or 
mode  of  action: 

republican  form  of  government,  a  true  democrat  and  a  con- 
servative statesman,  socialism  as  an  economic  panacea,  the 
communistic  theory,  single-taxer,  anarchism;  catholicity  of 
mind,  puritanical  ideas,  evangelical  spirit,  pharisaic  super- 
ciliousness; deist,  pantheism,  rationalist;  epicurean  tastes, 
stoic  endurance,  dualism  and  monism  in  present-day  philoso- 
phy, an  altruistic  world-view;  the  classics,  a  realistic  novel. 

10.  The  names  of  monastic  orders  and  their  members: 
Black  Friars,  Dominican,  Jesuit. 


8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

II.  The  proper  (official)  titles  of  social,  religious,  educa- 
tional, political,  commercial,  and  industrial  organiza- 
tions and  institutions: 

Union  League  Club,  Knights  Templar;  Young  People's 
Society  of  Christian  Endeavor,  Associated  Charities;  Smith- 
sonian Institution,  State  University  of  Iowa,  Hyde  Park  High 
School;  the  Commercial  Academy  (Handelsakademie)  of 
Leipzig,  the  Paris  Lyceum  (Lycee  de  Paris);  the  Forty 
Immortals];  Cook  County  Democracy,  Tammany  Hall; 
Associated  Press,  Typographical  Union  No.  16;  Chicago, 
Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad,  The  Macmillan  Company. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  generic  terms  when  used 
to  designate  a  class;  nor  when  standing  alone,  even 
if  applied  to  a  specific  institution,  except  to  avoid 
ambiguity  or,  rarely,  where  the  word  is  consistently 
and  clearly  used  in  place  of  the  true  name : 
young  people's  societies,  the  high  school  at  Lemont,  local 
typographical  unions;  the  club,  the  association,  the  company; 
but:  "He  joined  the  Hall  [Tammany],"  "a  member  of  the 
[French]  Academy."  (See  49.) 

12.  The  names  of  legislative,  judiciary,  and  administra- 
tive bodies  and  governmental  departments,  and  their 
branches,  when  specifically  applied: 
Congress  (Senate,  House  of  Representatives  [the  House], 
Committee  of  Ways  and  Means),  Parliament  (House  of 
Lords,  House  of  Commons),  Reichstag,  Chamber  of  Deputies 
(the  Chamber),  General  Assembly  of  Illinois,  Chicago  City 
Council,  South  Park  Commissioners;  Supreme  Court  of  the 
United  States,  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County,  [Sanhedrin]; 
Department  of  the  Interior,  Census  Office,  Springfield  Board 
of  Education,  Department  of  Public  Works. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  9 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  general,  paraphrastic,  or 
incomplete  designations  as — 

the  national  assembly,  the  legislature  of  the  state,  the  upper 
house  of  Congress,  the  German  federal  parliament,  the 
Dutch  diet;  the  council,  the  department,  the  board. 

13.  Ordinals    used    to   designate   Egyptian   dynasties, 
sessions  of  Congress,  names  of  regiments,  and  in 
similar  connections  (see  100): 

the  Eighteenth  Dynasty,  the  Fifty-third  Congress,  the  Second 
Illinois  Regiment  Band. 

14.  Commonly    accepted    appellations    for    historical 
epochs,  periods  in  the  history  of  a  language  or 
literature,  and  geological  ages  and  strata,  the  word 
"age"  itself  being  capitalized  only  where  a  failure 
to  do  so  would  result  in  ambiguous  meaning: 

Stone  age  (but:  Middle  Ages),  Crusades,  Renaissance, 
Reformation,  Inquisition,  Commonwealth  (Cromwell's), 
Commune  (Paris);  Old  English  (OE— see  123),  Middle 
High  German  (MHG),  the  Age  of  Elizabeth;  Pleistocene, 
Silurian,  Lower  Carboniferous. 

15.  Names  for  important  events: 

Thirty  Years'  War,  Peasants'  War  (German),  Revolution 
(French),  Revolutionary  War  or  War  of  Independence 
(American),  Whiskey  Insurrection  (American),  Civil  War 
(American),  War  of  1812,  Franco-Prussian  War,  Battle  of 
Gettysburg;  Peace  of  Utrecht,  Louisiana  Purchase. 

1 6.  Political  alliances,  and  such  terms  from  secular  or 
ecclesiastical  history  as  have,  through  their  associa- 


10  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

tions,  acquired  special  significance  as  designations 
for  parties,  classes,  movements,  etc.  (see  9) : 

Protestant  League,  Holy  Alliance,  Dreibund;  the  Roses,  the 
Roundheads,  Independents,  Independency  (English  history), 
Nonconformist,  Dissenter,  Separatist. 

17.  Conventions,  congresses,  expositions,  etc.: 

Council  of  Nicaea,  Parliament  of  Religions,  Fifteenth  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Criminology,  Westminster  Assembly, 
Chicago  World's  Fair,  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition. 

18.  Titles   of   specific   treaties,   acts,   laws   (juridical), 
bills,  etc.: 

Treaty  of  Verdun,  Art.  V  of  the  Peace  of  Prague,  Edict  of 
Nantes,  Concordat,  the  Constitution  (of  the  United  States, 
when  standing  alone,  or  when  referred  to  as  a  literary  docu- 
ment; but  not  usually  that  of  any  other  state  or  country,  e.g., 
the  constitution  of  Illinois),  Declaration  of  Independence, 
Act  of  Emancipation,  Magna  C(h)arta,  Corn  Law,  Reform 
Bill  (English),  Fourteenth  Amendment. 

19.  Creeds  and  confessions  of  faith: 

Apostles'  Creed,  Nicene  Creed  (but:  ante-Nicene — see  203, 
208),  Augsburg  Confession,  Thirty-nine  Articles. 

20.  Civic  holidays  and  ecclesiastical  fast  and  feast 
days: 

Fourth  of  July  (the  Fourth),  Labor  Day,  Thanksgiving  Day; 
Easter,  Passover,  Feast  of  Tabernacles,  New  Year's  Day. 

21.  Titles  of  honor  and  respect,  whether  religious, 
civil,  or  military,  preceding  the  name,  and  academic 
degrees,  in  abbreviated  form,  following  the  name; 
all  titles  of  honor  or  of  nobility,  when  referring  to 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  II 

specific  persons,  either  preceding  the  name  or 
used  in  place  of  the  proper  name;  familiar  names 
applied  to  particular  persons;  orders  (decorations) 
and  the  titles  accompanying  them;  titles,  without 
the  name,  used  in  direct  address;  titles  without 
the  name  when  used  of  existing  incumbents  of 
office;  and  such  words  as  " President,"  "King," 
"Czar"  ("Tsar"),  "Kaiser,"  "Sultan,"  and 
"Pope,"  standing  alone,  when  referring  to,  a 
specific  ruler  or  incumbent: 

Queen  Victoria,  ex-President  Cleveland,  Rear-Admiral 
Dewey,  Brigadier- General  Brown,  Lieutenant-Commander 
Smith;  United  States  Commissioner  of  Education  Harris, 
Dr.  Davis;  Father  Boniface,  Deacon  Smith;  Timothy 
Dwight,  DD.,  LL.D.;  the  Prince  of  Wales,  the  Marquis  of 
Lome,  His  Majesty,  His  Grace;  the  Apostle  to  the  Gentiles, 
"the  Father  of  his  Country";  order  of  the  Red  Eagle, 
Knight  Commander  of  the  Bath;  "Allow  me  to  suggest, 
Judge  .  .  .  .";  the  Bishop  of  London;  the  Senator; 
"The  President  [of  the  United  States]  was  chosen  arbitra- 
tor," "the  King  wore  his  robes,"  "the  Kaiser's  Moroccan 
policy." 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  official  title  of  a  person 
when  the  title  follows  the  name  (see  49);  when 
standing  alone,  without  the  name  (with  the  excep- 
tions noted  above,  and  see  49) ;  or  when,  followed 
by  the  name,  it  is  preceded  by  the  article  "the": 
McKinley,  president  of  the  United  States;  B.  L.  Gildersleeve, 
professor  of  Greek  (see  49);  Ferdinand  W.  Peck,  commis- 
sioner-general to  the  Paris  Exposition;  the  emperor  of 
Germany  (meaning  other  than  the  existing  emperor), 


12  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

the  archbishop  (meaning  other  than  the  existing  incumbent), 
the  senator  (when  not  speaking  of  the  existing  member), 
the  archduke  Francis  Ferdinand,  the  apostle  Paul. 

22.  Abbreviations  like  Ph.D.,  M.P.,  and  F.R.G.S.  (such 
titles  to  be  set  without  space  between  the  letters) 
(see  52,  103,  1 06).     But  do  not  capitalize  such 
phrases  when  spelled  out  (but  see  25) : 

doctor  of  philosophy,  fellow  of  the  Royal  Geographical 
Society. 

23.  Abbreviations  consisting  of  one  letter  only,  except 
in  case  of  units  of  measurement  and  minor  literary 
subdivisions  (see  54,  55,  no,  in): 

R.V.  (Revised  Version),  C.  (centigrade),  L.C.M.  (lowest 
common  multiple),  H.P.  (horse-power),  A  (angstrom  units). 

24.  Nouns  and  adjectives  used  to  designate  the  Supreme 
Being  or  Power,  or  any  member  of  the  Christian 
Trinity;    and  all  pronouns  referring  to  the  same, 
when  not  closely  preceded  or  followed  by  a  dis- 
tinctive name,  or  unless  such  reference  is  otherwise 
perfectly  clear: 

the  Almighty,  Ruler  of  the  universe,  the  First  Cause,  the 
Absolute,  Providence  (personified),  Father,  Son,  Holy  Ghost, 
the  Spirit,  Savior,  Messiah,  Son  of  Man,  the  Logos,  [and 
the  Virgin  Mary];  "Trust  Him  who  rules  all  things"  (but: 
"When  God  had  worked  six  days,  he  rested  on  the  seventh"). 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  and  deriva- 
tives as — 

(God's)  fatherhood,  (Jesus')  sonship,  messiahship,  messianic 
hope,  christological  (but:  Christology). 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  13 

25.  Words  which  have  an  acquired,  limited,  or  special 
meaning : 

the  Doctor's  degree;  a  report  of  the  Master  (in  chancery); 
a  Bachelor's  hood;  a  Freshman. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  expressions  as — 
the  doctorate,  a  master  in  chancery  (the  last  two  words  being 
explanatory,  the  capitalization  of  "master"  is  here  no  longer 
necessary  to  indicate  a  special  meaning). 

26.  "Nature"  and  similar  terms,  and  abstract  ideas, 
when  personified : 

"Nature  wields  her  scepter  mercilessly";  "Vice  in  the  old 
English  morality  plays." 

27.  "Father"  used  for  church  father,  and  "reformers" 
used  of  Reformation  leaders,  whenever  the  meaning 
otherwise  would  be  ambiguous: 

the  Fathers,  the  early  Fathers,  the  Greek  Fathers,  [Pilgrim 
Fathers],  the  Reformers  (but:  the  church  reformers  of  the 
fifteenth  century). 

28.  The   word    "church"    in   properly  cited    titles   of 
nationally  organized  bodies  of  believers  in  which, 
through  historical  associations,  it  has  become  insepa- 
rably linked  with  the  name  of  a  specific  locality;  or 
when  forming  part  of  the  name  of  a  particular 
edifice : 

Church  of  Rome,  Church  of  England,  High  Church;  Church 
of  the  Holy  Sepulcher,  Fifth  Avenue  Baptist  Church,  First 
Methodist  Church. 

But  do  not  capitalize,  except  as  noted  above,  when 
standing  alone,  in  any  sense — universal,  national, 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

local — or  when  the  name  is  not  correctly  or  fully 
quoted: 

the  church  (= organized  Christianity),  the  Eastern  (Greek 
Orthodox)  church,  the  Roman  Catholic  church,  the  estab- 
lished church  (but:  the  Establishment),  the  state  church;  the 
Baptist  church  in  Englewood. 

NOTE. — In  exceptional  cases,  where  the  opposition  of  Church 
and  State  constitutes  a  fundamental  part  of  the  argument,  and 
it  is  desired  to  lend  force  to  this  antithesis,  emphasis  may  be  added 
by  capitalizing  the  two  words.  (See  Preface  to  first  edition.) 

29.  Names  for  the  Bible  and  other  sacred  books: 

(Holy,  Sacred)  Scriptures,  Holy  Writ,  Word  of  God,  Book  of 
Books;  Koran,  Vedas,  Mishna,  the  Upanishads;  Apocrypha. 

But  do  not  capitalize  adjectives  derived  from  such 

nouns: 

biblical,  scriptural,  koranic,  vedic,  talmudic,  apocryphal. 

30.  Versions  of  the  Bible : 

King  James's  Version,  Authorized  Version  (A.V.),  Revised 
Version  (R.V.),  Polychrome  Bible,  Septuagint  (LXX), 
Peshitto. 

31.  Books  and  divisions  of  the  Bible  and  of  other  sacred 
books  (see  60) : 

Old  Testament,  Pentateuch,  Exodus,  II  (Second)  Kings, 
Book  of  Job,  Psalms  (Psalter),  the  [Mosaic]  Law  and  the 
[writings  of  the]  Prophets,  Minor  Prophets,  Wisdom  Literature, 
Gospel  of  Luke,  Synoptic  Gospels,  Fourth  Gospel,  Acts  of 
the  Apostles  (the  Acts),  Epistle  to  the  Romans,  Pastoral 
Epistles,  Apocalypse  (Revelation),  Sermon  on  the  Mount, 
Beatitudes,  Lord's  Prayer,  Ten  Commandments  (Decalogue), 
Judith,  Bel  and  the  Dragon. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  CAPITALIZATION  15 

But  do  not  capitalize  words  like  "book,"  "gospel," 
"epistle,"  "psalm"  in  such  connections  as  — 

the  five  books  of  Moses,  the  first  forty  psalms,  the  gospels 
and  epistles  of  the  New  Testament,  [the  synoptic  problem, 
the  synoptists],  the  biblical  apocalypses. 

32.  Biblical  parables: 

the  parable  of  the  Prodigal  Son. 

33.  Such  miscellaneous  terms  as  — 

Last  Supper,  Eucharist,  the  Passion,  the  Twelve  (apostles), 
the  Seventy  (disciples),  the  Servant,  the  Day  of  Yahweh,  the 
Chronicler,  the  Psalmist,  the  Golden  Rule. 

34.  The  first  word  of  a  sentence,  and  in  poetry  the  first 
word  of  each  line  : 

In  summer,  on  the  headlands, 

The  Baltic  Sea  along, 
Sits  Neckan,  with  his  harp  of  gold, 

And  sings  his  plaintive  song. 

In  Greek  and  Latin  poetry,  however,  capitalize  only 
the  first  word  of  a  paragraph,  not  of  each  verse 
(line): 

ToT<7i  8'  doiSos  aetSc  irepiK\vTO<s,  ol  Sc  (riwrrj 
etar'  aKOvovres*  6  8'  'A^aiwv  VOOTOV  aetSev, 
XvypoV,  ov  fK  T/aooys  CTTCTctAaro  HaAXas  'A0IJV7/. 
TOV  8'  virep<0i60ev  <f>pecrl  (rvvOtro  Ot&Trw  doi8i)v 
Kovprj  'Ixoptoio,  TT€pL<f>p<av 


Talia  praefantes  quondam  felicia  Pelei 
carmina  diuino  cecinerunt  pectore  Parcae 
praesentes:  namque  ante  domos  inuisere  castas 
heroum  et  sese  mortali  ostendere  coetu 
caelicolae  nondum  spreta  pietate  solebant. 


1 6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

35.  The  first  word  after  a  colon  only  when  introducing 
a  complete  passage,  or  sentence  which  would  have 
independent  meaning,  as  in  summarizations  and 
quotations  not  closely  connected  with  what  precedes; 
or  where  the  colon  has  the  weight  of  such  expres- 
sion as  "as  follows,"  "namely,"  "for  instance,"  or 
a  similar  phrase,  and  is  followed  by  a  logically  com- 
plete sentence: 

"In  conclusion  I  wish  to  say:  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above 
that  ....";  "As  the  old  proverb  has  it:  'Haste  makes 
waste'";  "My  theory  is:  The  moment  the  hot  current  strikes 
the  surface  .  .  .  ." 

But  do  not  capitalize  the  first  word  of  a  quotation  if 
immediately  connected  with  what  precedes  (unless, 
as  the  first  word  of  a  sentence,  beginning  a  paragraph 
in  reduced  type) ;  or  the  first  word  after  a  colon,  if 
an  implied  "namely,"  or  a  similar  term,  is  followed 
by  a  brief  explanatory  phrase,  logically  dependent 
upon  the  preceding  clause;  or  if  the  colon  signal- 
izes a  note  of  comment: 

"The  old  adage  is  true  that  'haste  makes  waste'";  "Two 
explanations  present  themselves:  either  he  came  too  late  for 
the  train,  or  he  was  detained  at  the  station";  "We  could  not 
prevail  upon  the  natives  to  recross  the  stream:  so  great  was 
their  superstition." 

36.  As  a  rule,  the  first  word  in  sections  of  enumeration, 
if  any  one  link  contains  two  or  more  distinct  clauses 
(not  inclosed  in  parentheses),  separated  by  a  semi- 
colon, colon,  or  period,  unless  all  are  dependent 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  17 

upon  the  same  term  preceding  and  leading  up  to 
them  (see  138): 

His  reasons  for  refusal  were  three:  (i)  He  did  not  have  the 
time.  (2)  He  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any  rate,  had  no 
funds  available  at  the  moment.  (3)  He  doubted  the  feasi- 
bility of  the  plan.  But:  He  objected  that  (i)  he  did  not 
have  the  time;  (2)  he  did  not  have  the  means;  or,  at  any 
rate,  had  no  funds  available;  (3)  he  doubted  the  feasibility 
of  the  plan. 

37.  As  a  rule,  nouns  followed  by  a  numeral — particu- 
larly   a    capitalized    Roman   numeral — indicating 
their  order  in  a  sequence : 

Room  16,  Ps.  20,  Grade  IV,  Act  I,  Vol.  I,  No.  2,  Book  II, 
Div.  Ill,  Part  IV. 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  minor  subdivisions  of 
publications  as — 

sec.  4,  scene  i,  art.  Hi,  art.  "Evidence,"  chap.  2  (ii),  p.  7 
(vii),  vs.  n,  1.  5,  n.  6.  (See  no.) 

38.  The  first  word  of  a  cited  speech  (thought)  in  direct 
discourse,  whether  preceded  by  a  colon  or  a  comma 
(on  this  see  131): 

On  leaving  he  remarked:  "Never  shall  I  forget  this  day"; 
With  the  words,  "Never  shall  I  forget  this  day,"  he  departed; 
I  thought  to  myself:  This  day  I  shall  never  forget  (without 
quotation  marks). 

39.  In  resolutions,  the  first  words  following  "WHEREAS" 
and  "Resolved": 

WHEREAS,  It  has  pleased  God  .  .  .  .  ;  therefore  be  it 
Resolved,  That  .... 


1 8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

40.  The  exclamations  "O"  and  "Oh"  (see  117): 

"O  Lord!"  "I  know  not,  Oh,  I  know  not!"  "Oh,  that  I 
were  home  again!" 

41.  All    the    principal   words    (i.e.,    nouns,    pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs,  verbs,  first  and  last  words)  in 
English  titles  of  publications  (books,  pamphlets,  doc- 
uments, periodicals,  reports,  proceedings,  etc.),  and 
their    divisions    (parts,  chapters,   sections,  poems, 
articles,  etc.) ;  in  subjects  of  lectures,  papers,  toasts, 
etc.;    in  cap-and- small-cap  and  italic  center-heads 
(both  of  which,  however,  should  be  avoided),  and 
bold-face  cut-in  heads  and  side-heads;    in  cap-and- 
small-cap  box-heads  in  tables  (see  279-83) : 

The  Men  Who  Made  the  Nation;  The  American  College- 
Its  Past  and  Present;  the  Report  of  the  Committee  of  Nine; 
"In  the  Proceedings  of  the  National  Education  Association 
for  1907  there  appeared  a  paper  entitled,  'The  Financial 
Value  of  Education.' " 

NOTE. — The  Botanical  Gazette  capitalizes  only  first  words  and 
proper  names;  and  the  practice  may  properly  be  followed  in 
general  bibliographies,  such  as  are  to  be  found  under  the  title 
"Literature  Cited"  in  the  Botanical  Gazette  (see  60).  This  style 
is  very  generally  followed  by  librarians  and  others  in  the  com- 
pilation of  lists  of  books  and  publications. 

42.  In  foreign  titles,  in  addition  to  capitalizing  the  first 
word,  follow  these  general  rules : 

a)  In  Latin,  capitalize  proper  nouns,  and  adjectives 

derived  therefrom: 

De  amicitia.  Bettum  Gallicum. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  1 9 

b)  In  French,  Italian,  Spanish,  Swedish,  and  Nor- 
wegian titles,  capitalize  proper  nouns  but  not  ad- 
jectives derived  therefrom: 

Histoire  de  la  litterature  franfaise,  Novelle  e  racconti  popolari 
italiani,  Antologia  de  poetas  liricos  castellanos,  Svenska  litter  a- 
turens  historie. 

c)  In  German  and  Danish,  capitalize  all  nouns  but 
not  the  adjectives,  except  German  adjectives  derived 
from  the  names  of  persons: 

Geschichte  des  deutschen  Feudalwesens  (but:  die  Homerische 
Frage"),  Videnskabens  Fremskridt  i  detnittende  Aarhundrede. 

d)  In  Dutch,  capitalize  all  nouns,  and  all  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  nouns: 

Geschiedenis  der  Nederlandsche  Taal. 

43.  In  mentioning  titles  of  newspapers  and  magazines 
do  not,  as  a  rule,  treat  the  definite  article  as  part  of 
the  title: 

the  Chicago  Tribune,  the  School  Review. 

44.  Tides  of  ancient  manuscripts  (singular,  MS;  plural, 
MSS)  (see  60): 

Codex  Bernensis,  Cod.  Canonicianus. 

45.  In  titles  with  the  main  words  capitalized,  all  nouns 
forming  parts  of  hyphenated  compounds : 
"Twentieth-Century  Progress,"    "The  Economy  of  High- 
Speed  Trains." 

But  do  not  capitalize  such  components  when  other 
than  nouns:  . 

Fifty-first  Street,  "Lives  of  Well-known  Authors,"  "World- 
Dominion  of  English-speaking  Peoples." 


20  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

46.  In  botanical,  geological,  zoological,  and  paleon to- 
logical  matter,  the  scientific  (Latin)  names  of  divi- 
sions, orders,  families,  and  genera,  but  not  their 
English  derivatives: 

Cotylosauria,  but:  cotylosaurs;  Felidae,  but:  felids; 
Carnivora,  but:  carnivores. 

Also  in  botanical  and  zoological  matter,  the  names 
of  species,  if  derived  from  names  of  persons,  or 
from  generic  names;  but  in  geological  and  medical 
matter  the  names  of  species  are  never  capitalized: 
Felis  leo,  Cocos  nudfera,  Rosa  Carolina,  Parkinsonia  Torrey- 
ana,  Styrax  californica,  Lythrum  hyssopifolia,  Phyteuma 
Halleri,  Car  ex  Halleriana  (but  [geological] :  Pterygomatopus 
schmidti,  Conodectus  favosus) .  (See  71.) 

47.  The  names  and  epithets  of  peoples,  races,  and  tribes: 
Kafir,  Negro  (in  its  ethnical  sense),  Hottentot,  Makassar, 
Buginese,  Celestials. 

48.  In  astronomical  work,  the  names  of  the  bodies  of 
our  solar  system  (except  "sun,"  "earth,"  "moon," 
"stars"): 

the  Milky  Way,  the  Great  Bear,  Saturn. 

49.  Divisions,    departments,    officers,    and    courses   of 
study  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  in  all  official 
work  dealing  with  its  administration  or  curricula: 

(the  University),  the  School  of  Education  (the  School),  the 
University  Extension  Division  (but:  the  division),  the  Depart- 
ment of  Anthropology  (but:  the  department);  the  Board  of 
Trustees  (the  Trustees,  the  Board),  the  Senate,  the  Council, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   CAPITALIZATION  21 

the  Faculty  of  the  College  of  Commerce  and  Administration, 
Dean  of  the  Faculties  (but:  the  faculty);  the  President,  the 
Registrar,  Professor  of  Physics,  Assistant  in  Chemistry, 
Fellow,  Scholar;  the  Van  Husen  Scholarship  (but:  the 
scholarship) ;  courses  in  Political  Economy,  Autumn  Quarter 
(but:  a  quarter),  First  Term  (but:  two  terms;  major,  minor); 
[Hall  (referring  to  the  University  dormitories)]. 

USE  CAPITALS  AND  SMALL  CAPITALS  FOR — 

50.  The  names  of  town  and  state  in  the  date  line,  and 
the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  beginning,  of  letters, 
and  the  signature  and  residence  at  the  end  of  letters 
or  articles,  etc.: 

CHICAGO,  ILL.,  January  i,  1911 

(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  preferably  in 
smaller  type  than  the  body  of  the  letter.) 

MY  DEAR  MR.  SMITH: 

(Set  flush,  followed  by  a  colon,  in  the  same  type  as  the  body 
of  the  letter,  and  in  a  separate  line,  unless  preceded  by 
another  line  giving  the  name  and  address,  in  which  case  it 
should  be  run  in  with  the  text  of  the  letter,  indented  as  a 
paragraph  [see  64].) 

CHARLES  W.  SCOTT 

(Set  to  the  right,  with  one  em's  indention,  and  in  the  same 
type  as  the  body  of  the  letter  or  article.) 

HARVARD  UNIVERSITY 

CAMBRIDGE,  MASS. 

June  7,  1911 

(Set  to  the  left,  with  two  ems'  indention,  in  smaller  type.) 
(Each  line  of  the  address  should  be  in  caps  and  small  caps, 
and  should  be  centered  on  the  one  preceding.  The  date 


22  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

should  be  in  caps  and  lower  case,  likewise  centered  on  those 
above.) 

51.  In  resolutions,  the  word  "WHEREAS"  (see  39);   in 
notes   (not  footnotes),   the  word   "NOTE,"   which 
should  be  followed  by  a  period  and  a  dash;  in  con- 
stitutions, by-laws,  etc.,  the  word  "SECTION"  intro- 
ducing paragraphs  and  followed  by  a  number: 

NOTE. — It  should  be  noticed  that  .... 

SECTION  i.    This  association  shall  be  styled  .... 

The  usual  practice  is  to  abbreviate  the  word 
"section"  each  time  it  is  used  in  such  a  connection, 
except  the  first: 

SECTION  i.    The  name  of  the  association   .... 
SEC.  2.    The  object  of  the  association  .... 

SET  IN  SMALL  CAPITALS — 

52.  A.M.  and  P.M.  (ante  and   post  meridiem),  and  B.C. 
and  A.D.  ("before  Christ"  and  anno  Domini) ;  these 
should  be  set  without  a  space  between  (see  22, 
103,  106,  219): 

11:30  A.M.;  53  B.C.,  1906  A.D. 

USE  SMALL  (i.e.,  "lower-case")  INITIAL  LETTER  FOR— 

53.  Words  of  common  usage,  originally  proper  names, 
and  their  derivatives,  in  whose  present,  generalized 
acceptation  the  origin  has  become  obscured,  and 
generally   all   verbs   derived    from    proper    names 
(see  i): 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  CAPITALIZATION  23 

Utopia,  bohemian,  philistine,  titanic,  platonic,  quixotic, 
bonanza,  china,  morocco,  guinea-pig,  boycott,  roman  (type), 
italicize,  anglicize,  macadamize. 

54.  In  literary  references  such  minor  subdivisions  and 
their  abbreviations  as — 

chapter,  section,  page,  article,  verse,  line,  note;  chap.,  sec., 
p.,  art.,  vs.,  1.,  n.  (See  37,  no,  and  237.) 

55.  Units  of  measurement  as — 

h.=hour,  min.==minute,  sec.=second;  lb.=pound,  oz.= 
ounce;  yd.=yard,  ft. = foot;  etc. 

56.  In  italic  side-heads,  all  but  the  first  word  and  proper 
names  (see  172  and  280). 

57.  The  first  word  of  a  quotation  which,  through  a  con- 
junction or  otherwise,  is  immediately  connected  with 
what  precedes,  even  if  such  word  in  the  original 
begins  a  sentence. 

For  illustration  and  exception  see  35  and  131. 


24  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


THE  USE  OF  ITALICS 
ITALICIZE — 

58.  Words  or  phrases  to  which  it  is  desired  to  lend 
emphasis,  importance,  etc.: 

"This  was,  however,  not  the  case";  "It  is  sufficiently  plain 
that  the  sciences  of  life,  at  least,  are  studies  of  processes." 

59.  Words  and  phrases  from  foreign  languages,  inserted 
into  the  English  text,  and  not  incorporated  into  the 
English  language;  and  also  (as  a  rule)  single  sen- 
tences or  brief  passages  not  of  sufficient  length  to 
call  for  reduced  type  (see  85) : 

"the  Darwinian  Weltanschauung";  "Napoleon's  coup  d'etat"; 
"the  debater  par  excellence  of  the  Senate ";  "De  gustibus  non 
est  disputandum,  or,  as  the  French  have  it,  Chacun  a  son 
gout." 

But  do  not  italicize  foreign  titles  preceding  names, 
or  names  of  foreign  institutions  or  places  the  meaning 
or  position  of  which  in  English  would  have  required 
roman  type,  and  which  either  are  without  English 
equivalents  or  are  by  preference  used  in  lieu  of  these: 

Pere  Lagrange,  Freiherr  von  Schwenau;  the  German 
Reichstag,  the  Champs  Elysees,  the  Museo  delle  Terme; 

nor  words  of  everyday  occurrence  which  have  become 
sufficiently  anglicized,  even  though  still  retaining  the 
accents  of  the  original  language : 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS 


a  posteriori 

ennui 

per  cent 

a  priori 

entre*e 

per  contra 

apropos 

ex  cathedra 

personnel 

aide  de  camp 

ex  omcio 

postmortem 

Alma  Mater 

expose* 

(n.  and  adj.) 

attache* 

facade 

prima  facie 

bas-relief 

facsimile 

pro  and  con(tra) 

beau  ideal 

f6te 

prote*ge* 

bona  fide 

habeas  corpus 

pro  tern  (pore) 

bric-a-brac 

habitue* 

questionnaire 

cafe 

innuendo 

queue 

charge  d'affaires 

leve*e 

regime 

chiaroscuro 

litterateur 

rendezvous 

clientele 

litterati 

resume* 

confrere 

massage 

reveille 

connoisseur 

matinee 

role 

creche 

me-tee 

savant 

criterion  (-a) 

menu 

sobriquet 

cul-de-sac 

motif 

soire*e 

data 

naive 

te'te-a-te'te 

debris 

ne'e 

tonneau 

debut 

net 

umlaut 

decollete 

neVe* 

verbatim 

denouement 

niche 

verso 

de*p6t  (=  depository) 

nil 

versus  (v.,  vs.) 

doctrinaire 

nom  de  plume 

via 

dramatis  personae 

papier  mache 

vice  versa 

dclat 

per  annum 

vis-a-vis 

elite 

per  capita 

viva  voce 

60.  Titles  of  publications — books  (including  plays,  essays, 
cycles  of  poems,  and  single  poems  of  considerable 
length,  usually  printed  separately,  and  not  from  the 
context  understood  to  form  parts  of  a  larger  volume 
[see  81]),  pamphlets,  treatises,  tracts,  documents, 
and  periodicals  (including  regularly  appearing  pro- 
ceedings and  transactions;  and  also  the  name  of  a 
journal  appearing  in  the  journal  itself)  (see  41) ;  and 


26  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

in  the  case  of  newspapers,  periodicals,  etc.,  the 
name  of  the  city  (where  published)  when  forming 
an  integral  part  of  the  name : 

Spencer,  Principles  of  Sociology;  A  Midsummer-Night's 
Dream;  Idylls  of  the  King;  Paradise  Lost;  the  Modern 
Language  Review,  the  Chicago  Tribune,  the  New  York 
Times,  Report  of  the  United  States  Commissioner  of  Education. 

NOTE. — The  Botanical  Gazette  uses  italics  for  such  titles  in  the 
text  only;  in  footnotes,  roman.  Its  own  name  it  prints  in  caps 
and  small  caps — BOTANICAL  GAZETTE. 

This  rule  may  be  departed  from  in  lengthy  biblio- 
graphical lists,  in  tables,  or  in  other  matter  where 
to  follow  it  would  result  in  an  undue  preponder- 
ance of  italics  (see  note  to  41). 
Books  of  the  Bible,  both  canonical  and  apocryphal, 
and  titles  of  ancient  manuscripts  should  be  set  in 
roman  type,  as  also  symbols  used  to  designate 
manuscripts  (see  31  and  44): 
Di6,  M6,  P,  J. 

61.  The  following  words,  phrases,  and  abbreviations 
used  in  literary  and  legal  references: 

ad  loc.,  circa  (ca.),  et  al.,  ibid.,  idem,  infra,  loc.  cit.,  op.  cit., 
passim,  sic,  supra,  s.v.,  vide. 

But  do  not  italicize — 

cf.,  e.g.,  i.e.,  v.  or  vs.  (versus),  viz.,  etc. 

62.  The  words  See  and  See  also,  when  used  in  an  index 
or  similar  compilation,  for  the  purpose  of  a  cross- 
reference,  where  the  differentiation  of  those  words 
from  the  context  is  desirable;   and  the  words  for 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS  27 

and  read  in  lists  of  errata,  to  separate  them  from 
the  incorrect  and  correct  readings: 
See  also  Sociology;  for  levee  read  levee. 

63.  The  names  of  plaintiff  and  defendant  in  the  citation 
of  legal  causes;  also  the  titles  of  proceedings  con- 
taining such  prefixes  as  in  re,  ex  parte,  and  In  the 
matter  of,  etc.: 

Conolly  v.  Union  Sewer  Pipe  Co.;  In  re  Smith;  Ex  parte 
Brown;  In  the  matter  of  the  petition  of  Henry  Robinson  for  a 
writ  of  habeas  corpus. 

64.  Address  lines  in  speeches,  reports,  etc.,  and  primary 
address  lines  in  letters  (set  flush,  in  a  separate  line, 
with  nouns  capitalized  [see  50]) : 

Mr.  President,  Ladies  and  Gentlemen: 
Mr.  John  Smith,  321  Dearborn  Street,  Chicago,  III. 
DEAR  SIR:  I  take  pleasure  in  announcing  .... 

65.  In  signatures,  the  position  or  title  added  after  the 
name.    If  this  consists  of  only  one  word,  it  is  run  into 
the  same  line  with  the  name;   if  of  more  than  one, 
but  no  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  first  letter 
under  the  name  line,  and  indent  one  em  on  the 
right;  if  longer  than  the  name,  center  the  name  over 
the  second  line  and  set  this  flush.    These  rules  are, 
however,  subject  to  the  exigencies  of  special  cases : 

ARTHUR  P.  MAGUIRE,  Secretary 
Yours  very  truly, 

CARTER  H.  HARRISON 

Mayor  of  Chicago 
CHARLES  M.  GAYLEY 
Professor  of  English  Language  and  Literature 


28  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

66.  a),  &),  c),  etc.,  used  to  indicate  subdivisions  (single 
parenthesis  if  beginning  a  paragraph,  double  paren- 
theses if  "run  in");  and  a,  b,  c,  etc.,  affixed  to  the 
number  of  verse,  page,  etc.,  to  denote  fractional  part: 
Luke  4:310. 

67.  Letters  used  to  designate  unknown  quantities,  lines, 
etc.,  in  algebraic,  geometrical,  and  similar  matter: 
ac+bc=c(a+b)',  the  lines  ad  and  AD;  the  n\h  power. 

68.  As  a  rule,  letters  in  legends  or  in  the  text  referring 
to  corresponding  letters  in  accompanying  illustra- 
tions: 

"At  the  point  A  above  (see  diagram)." 

69.  References  to  particular  letters: 
the  letter  «,  a  small  v. 

70.  s.  andd.  (= shillings  and  pence)  following  numerals: 
3$.  6d.     (See  270.) 

71.  In  zoological,  geological,  and  paleontological  mat- 
ter, scientific  (Latin)  names  of  genera  and  species 
when  used  together,  the  generic  name  being  in  the 
nominative  singular : 

Felis    leo,    Rosa    Carolina,    Conodectes  favosus,  Phyteuma 
Halleri.     (See  46,  48.) 

In  botanical,  geological,  and  paleontological  matter 
the  names  of  genera  and  species  when  used  together, 
and  of  genera,  only,  when  used  alone: 
Acer  saccharum,  Basidiobolus,  Alternaria,  Erythrosuchus. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  ITALICS  29 

In  medical  matter,  however,  the  general  practice 
is  to  print  such  names  in  roman,  avoiding  italics 
altogether. 

In  astronomical  and  astrophysical  matter : 

a)  The    lower-case     letters    designating    certain 
Fraunhof er  lines : 

a,  b,  g,  h. 

b)  The  lower-case  letters  used  by  Baeyer  to  desig- 
nate certain  stars  in  constellations  for  which  the 
Greek  letters  have  been  exhausted: 

/  Tauri,  u  Herculis. 

In  accordance  with  the  best  modern  practice, 
italics  should  no  longer  be  used  for: 

a)  The  Greek,  Latin,  and  Arabic  names  of  planets, 
satellites,  constellations,  and  individual  stars : 
Jupiter,  Tethys,  Lyra,  Antares,  \l/  Orionis. 

b)  Designations  of  celestial  objects  in  well-known 
catalogues;  also  the  Flamsteed  numbers: 

M  13  (for  No.  13  of  Messier's  Catalogue  of  Nebulae  and 
Clusters'),  Bond  619,  N.G.C.  6165,  B.D.-i80487i;  85 
Pegasi,  Lalande  5761. 

But  when  initials  are  used  to  express  the  titles  of 
catalogues,    as    such,    and    not   to   designate   a 
particular  celestial  object,  such  initials  are  to  be 
italicized  (see  60): 
B.D.,  N.G.C. 


30  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

c)  Symbols  for  the  chemical  elements : 
H,  Ca,  Ti. 

d)  The  capital  letters  given  by  Fraunhofer  to 
spectral  lines : 

A-H,  and  K. 

e)  The  letters  designating  the  spectral  types  of 
stars : 

A5,  B3,  Mb. 

/)  The  capital  letter  H  with  different  Greek  sub- 
script letters,  used  to  designate  lines  of  hydrogen: 
Ha,  H/3,  etc. 

72.  In  resolutions,  the  word  "Resolved."     (See  39.) 

73.  After  headlines  or  titles,  as  a  rule,  the  word  "Con- 
tinued11; and  "To  be  continued11  at  the  end  of  articles 
(see  179): 

THE  SCOPE  OF  SOCIOLOGY— Continued 
[To  be  continued] 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  QUOTATIONS  31 


QUOTATIONS 

PUT  BETWEEN  QUOTATION  MARKS  (and  in  roman  type — 
i.e.,  "roman-quote") — 

74.  Citations,  run  into  the  text,  of  a  passage  from  an 
author  in  his  own  words  (see  85). 

75.  Quotations  from  different  authors,  or  from  different 
works  by  the  same  author,  following  each  other, 
uninterrupted  by  any  intervening  original  matter,  or 
by  any  reference  to  their  respective  sources  (other 
than  a  reference  figure  for  a  footnote),  even  though 
such  quotations  are  reduced  (see  85-87). 

76.  A  word  or  phrase  accompanied  by  its  definition: 
"Drop-folio"  means  a  page-number  at  the  foot  of  the  page. 

77.  An  unusual,  technical,  ironical,  etc.,  word  or  phrase 
in  the  text,  whether  or  not  accompanied  by  a  word, 
like  "so-called,"  directing  attention  to  it: 

Her  "five  o' clocks"  were  famous  in  the  neighborhood;  She 
was  wearing  a  gown  of  "lobster-colored"  silk;  He  was  elected 
"master  of  the  rolls";  We  then  repaired  to  what  he  called 
his  "quarter  deck";  A  "lead"  is  then  inserted  between  the 
lines;  This  so-called  "man  of  affairs." 

78.  In  translations,  the  English  equivalent  of  a  word, 
phrase,  or  passage  from  a  foreign  language: 

Weltanschauung,  "world-view"  or  "fundamental  aspect  of 
life";  Mommsen  Romische  Geschichte  ("History  of  Rome"). 


32  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

79.  The  particular  word  or  words  to  which  attention  is 
directed: 

the  term  "lynch  law";  the  phrase  "liberty  of  conscience"; 
the  concepts  "good"  and  "bad";  the  name  "Chicago." 

80.  Serial  titles: 

"English  Men  of  Letters"  series;  "International  Critical 
Commentary." 

81.  Titles  of  shorter  poems  (see  60): 
Shelley's  "To  a  Skylark." 

82.  Cited  titles  of  subdivisions  (e.g.,  parts,  books,  chap- 
ters, etc.)  of  publications;  titles  of  papers,  lectures, 
sermons,  articles,  toasts,  mottoes,  etc.: 

The  Beginnings  of  the  Science  of  Political  Economy,  Vol.  I, 
"The  British  School,"  chap,  ii,  "John  Stuart  Mill";  the 
articles  "Cross,"  "Crucifixion,"  and  "Crusade"  in  Hast- 
ings' Dictionary  of  the  Bible;  The  subject  of  the  lecture  was 
"Japan — Its  Past,  Present,  and  Future";  the  next  toast  on 
the  program  was  "Our  German  Visitor";  The  king's 
motto  is  "For  God  and  My  Country." 

NOTE. — The  Botanical  Gazette,   in  footnotes,   does  not   use 
quotation  marks  for  such  titles. 

References  to  the  Preface,  Introduction,  Table  of 
Contents,  Index,  etc.,  of  a  specific  work,  should  be 
set  with  capitals,  without  quotation  marks: 

Preface,  p.  iii;  "The  Introduction  contains  .  .  .  .";  "The 
Appendix  occupies  a  hundred  pages";  but:  "The  book  has 
a  very  complete  index." 

83.  Names  of  ships: 

the  U.S.  SS.  "Oregon." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  QUOTATIONS  33 

84.  Titles  of  pictures  and  works  of  art : 
Murillo's  "The  Holy  Family." 

SET  IN  SMALLER  TYPE — 

85.  Ordinarily,  all  prose  extracts  which  will  make  five 
or  more  lines  in  the  smaller  type,  and  all  poetry 
citations  of  two  lines  or  more.    An  isolated  prose 
quotation,  even  though  its  length  would  bring  it 
under  this  rule,  may  properly  be  run  into  the  text,  if 
it  bears  an  organic  relation  to  the  argument  pre- 
sented.    On  the  other  hand,  a  quotation  of  one  or 
two  lines  which  is  closely  preceded  or  followed  by 
longer  extracts,  set  in  smaller  type,  may  likewise  be 
reduced,  as  a  matter  of  uniform  appearance. 

86.  As  a  rule,  reduce  from  n-pt.  and  lo-pt.  to  g-pt., 
from  g-pt.  to  8-pt.,  from  8-pt.  to  6-pt.  (see  252). 

87.  Reduced  citations  should  not  have  quotation  marks, 
except  in  such  cases  as  noted  in  75;   nor  should 
quotation  marks,  as  a  rule,  be  used  in  connection 
with  italics. 

GENERAL  RULES— 

88.  Quotation  marks  should  always  include  ellipses,  and 
the  phrase  "etc."  when  it  otherwise  would  not  be 
clear  that  it  stands  for  an  omitted  part  of  the  matter 
quoted,  perfect  clearness  in  each  individual  case 
being  the  best  criterion : 

"Art.  II,  sec.  2,  of  the  Constitution  provides  that  'each  state 
shall  appoint  ....  a  number  of  electors  equal  to  the  whole 


34  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

number  of  senators  and  representatives  .  .  .  .'";  "He  also 
wrote  a  series  of  'Helps  to  Discovery,  etc.'" — "etc."  here 
indicating,  not  that  he  wrote  other  works  which  are  unnamed, 
but  that  the  title  of  the  one  named  is  not  given  in  full;  but, 
on  the  other  hand:  "Preaching  from  the  text,  'For  God  so 

loved   the  world,'  etc " — "etc."  here  being  placed 

outside  of  the  quotation  marks  in  order  to  show  that  it  does 
not  stand  for  other,  unnamed,  objects  of  God's  love. 

89.  Quoted  prose  matter  (i.e.,  matter  set  with  quotation 
marks;   see  above)  which  is  broken  up  into  para- 
graphs should  have  the  quotation  marks  repeated 
at  the  beginning  of  each  paragraph. 

90.  Where  alignment  is  desired,  the  quotation  marks 
should  be  "cleared" — i.e.,  should  project  beyond 
the  line  of  alignment: 

"Keep  away  from  dirtiness — keep  away  from  mess. 
Don't  get  into  doin'  things  rather-more-or-less!" 

91.  Double  quotation  marks  are  used  for  primary  quota- 
tions;   for  a  quotation  within  a  quotation,  single; 
going  back  to  double  for  a  third,  to  single  for  a 
fourth,  and  so  on: 

"The  orator  then  proceeded:  'The  dictionary  tells  us  that 
"the  words,  'freedom'  and  'liberty,'  though  often  inter- 
changed, are  distinct  in  some  of  their  applications."  '  " 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING  35 


SPELLING 

SPELL  OUT — 

92.  All  religious,  civil,  and  military  titles  of  honor  and 
respect,  and  forms  of  address,  preceding  the  name, 
except  Mr.,  Messrs.,  Mrs.   (French:    M.,  MM., 
Mme,  Mile),  Dr.,  Rev.,  Hon.,  St.  (do  not,  except 
in  quotations  and  in  correspondence,  set  the  Rev., 
the  Hon.);   Esq.,  following  the  name,  should  like- 
wise always  be  abbreviated. 

93.  Christian  names,  as  George,  Charles,  John  (not: 
Geo.,  Chas.,  Jno.),  except  where  the  abbreviated 
form  is  used  in  quoted  matter  or  in  original  signa- 
tures; and  "von"  as  part  of  a  person's  name  (see 
240). 

94.  Subject  to  the  exceptions  named  at  the  end  of  this 
section,  in  ordinary  reading-matter,  all  numbers  of 
less  than  three  digits,   unless  of  a  statistical  or 
technical  character,  or  unless  occurring  in  groups 
of  six  or  more  following  each  other  in  close  succes- 
sion: 

"There  are  thirty-eight  cities  in  the  United  States  with  a 
population  of  100,000  or  over";  "a  fifty-yard  dash";  "two 
pounds  of  sugar";  "Four  horses,  sixteen  cows,  seventy-six 
sheep,  and  a  billy  goat  constituted  the  live  stock  of  the  farm"; 
"He  spent  a  total  of  two  years,  three  months,  and  seventeen 
days  in  jail."  But:  "He  spent  128  days  in  the  hospital"; 
"a  board  20  feet  2  inches  long  by  i^  feet  wide  and  ij  inches 


36          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

thick";  the  ratio  of  16  to  i";  "In  some  quarters  of  Paris, 
inhabited  by  wealthy  families,  the  death-rate  is  i  to  every  65 
persons;  in  others,  inhabited  by  the  poor,  it  is  i  to  15";  "His 
purchase  consisted  of  2  pounds  of  sugar,  20  pounds  of  flour, 
i  pound  of  coffee,  \  pound  of  tea,  3  pounds  of  meat,  and 
i^  pounds  of  fish,  besides  2  pecks  of  potatoes  and  a  pint  of 
vinegar." 

Treat  all  numbers  in  connected  groups  alike,  as  far 
as  possible;  do  not  use  figures  for  some  ancl  spell  out 
others;  if  the  largest  contains  three  or  more  digits, 
use  figures  for  all  (see  96) : 

"The  force  employed  during  the  three  months  was  87,  93, 
and  106,  respectively." 

As  a  general  rule,  however,  decimals,  degrees, 
dimensions,  distances,  enumerations,  money,  per- 
centage, weights,  and  like  matter  should  be 
expressed  in  figures: 

10°,  45  miles,  3  cubic  feet,  24  pages,  100  bushels,  9  per  cent 
(see  123),  45  pounds,  $1,000,  etc. 

95.  Round   numbers  (i.e.,  approximate  figures  in  even 
units,  the  unit  being  100  in  numbers  of  less  than 
1,000,  and  1,000  in  numbers  of  more) : 

"The  attendance  was  estimated  at  five  hundred"  (but:  "at 
550");  "a  thesis  of  about  three  thousand  words"  (but:  "of 
about  2,700");  "The  population  of  Chicago  is  approximately 
two  millions"  (but:  "1,900,000").  Cases  like  1,500,  if  for 
some  special  reason  spelled  out,  should  be  written  "fifteen 
hundred,"  not  "one  thousand  five  hundred." 

96.  All  numbers,  no  matter  how  high,  commencing  a 
sentence  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING  37 

"Five  hundred  and  ninety-three  men,  417  women,  and  126 
children  under  eighteen,  besides  63  of  the  crew,  went  down 
with  the  ship." 

When  this  is  impracticable,  or  for  any  reason  unde- 
sirable, reconstruct  the  sentence;   e.g.: 
"The  total  number  of  those  who  went  down  with  the  ship 
was  593  men,"  etc. 

97.  Sums  of  money,  when  occurring  in  isolated  cases  in 
ordinary  reading-matter : 

"The  admission  was  two  dollars." 
When  several  such  numbers  occur  close  together,  and 
in  all  matter  of  a  statistical  character,  use  figures: 
"Admission:  men,  $2;  women,  $i;  children,  25  cents." 

98.  Time  of  day,  in  ordinary  reading-matter: 

at  four;  at  half-past  two  in  the  afternoon;  at  seven  o'clock. 
Statistically,  in  enumerations,  and  always  in  connec- 
tion with  A.M.  and  P.M.,  use  figures: 
at  4: 15  P.M.  (omit  "o'clock"  in  such  connections). 

99.  Ages: 

eighty  years  and  four  months  old;  children  between  six  and 
fourteen. 

ioo.  Numbers  of  centuries,  of  Egyptian  dynasties,  of 
sessions  of  Congress,  of  military  bodies,  of  political 
divisions,  of  thoroughfares,  and  in  all  similar  cases, 
unless  brevity  is  an  important  consideration  (see 
7,  8,  and  13): 

nineteenth  century;  Fifth  Dynasty;  Fifty-fourth  Congress, 
Second  Session;  Fifteenth  Infantry  I.N.G.;  Sixth  Con- 
gressional District,  Second  Ward;  Fifth  Avenue. 


38  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

1 01.  References  to  particular  decades: 
in  the  nineties. 

102.  Names  of  months,  except  in  statistical  matter  or  in 
long  enumerations: 

from  January  i  to  April  15  (omit,  after  dates,  st,  d,  and  th). 

103.  "United  States,"  except  in  quotations  and  such  con- 
nections as:    General  Schofield,  U.S.A.;    U.S.  SS. 
"  Oregon";  in  footnotes  and  similar  references:  U.S. 
Geological  Survey  (see  22,  52,  106). 

104.  "Railroad  (-way),"  and    "Fort,"    "Mount,"  and 
"Port"  in  geographical  appellations  (see  4): 

Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad  (not:  R.R.  or  Ry.); 
Fort  Wayne,  Mount  Elias,  Port  Huron. 

105.  In  most  cases,  all  names  of  publications.    This  rule, 
like  many  another,  is  open  to  modification  in  particu- 
lar instances,  for  which  no  directions  can  here  be 
given.    Expediency,  nature  of  context,  authoritative 
usage,  and  author's  preference  are  some  of  the  points 
to  be  considered.     Generally,  if  in  doubt,  spell  out; 
good  taste  will  condone  offenses  in  this  direction 
more  readily  than  in  the  opposite. 

ABBREVIATE — 

1 06.  Names  of  states,  territories,  and  possessions  of  the 
United  States  following  those  of  towns,  as  follows, 
without  space  between   the  letters  of  abbrevia- 
tions (see  22,  52,  103),  when  mentioned  in  lists, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   SPELLING  39 


bibliographical  matter,  etc.,  but  not  ordinarily  in 

text-matter  : 

Ala. 

la. 

Neb. 

Samoa 

Alaska 

Kan. 

Nev. 

S.C. 

Ariz. 

Ky. 

N.H. 

S.D. 

Ark. 

La. 

NJ. 

Tenn. 

Cal. 

Me. 

N.M. 

Tex. 

Colo. 

Mass. 

N.Y. 

T.H.= 

Territory 

Conn. 

Md. 

Ohio 

of  Hawaii 

D.C. 

Mich. 

Okla. 

Utah 

Del. 

Minn. 

Ore. 

Vt. 

Fla. 

Miss. 

Pa. 

Va. 

Ga. 

Mo. 

P.I.  =  Philippine 

Wash. 

Idaho 

Mont. 

Islands 

Wis. 

111. 

N.C. 

P.R.  =  Porto  Rico 

W.Va. 

Ind. 

N.D. 

R.I. 

Wyo. 

107.  In  technical  matter  (footnote  references,  bibliogra- 
phies, etc.),  "Company"  and  "Brothers,"  and  the 
word  "and"  (&  =  "short  and"  or  "ampersand"),  in 
names  of  commercial  firms: 

The  Macmillan  Co.,  Macmillan  &  Co.,  Harper  Bros.; 
Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul  Railroad. 

In  text-matter,  not  of  a  technical  character,  "  Com- 
pany" and  "Brothers"  may,  however,  be  spelled  out: 
"Harper  Brothers  have  recently  published  .  .  .  .";  "The 
Century  Company  announces  .  .  .  .";  "The  extraordinary 
story  of  the  South  Sea  Company." 

And  when  the  name  of  a  commercial  concern  does 
not  consist  of  proper  names,  the  "and"  should  be 
spelled  out: 
American  Steel  and  Wire  Co. 

108.  "Saint"  before  a  name: 

St.  Louis,  St.  Peter's  Church,  SS.  Peter  and  Paul. 


40  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

"St."  should,  however,  preferably  be  omitted  in 
connection  with  the  names  of  apostles,  evangelists, 
and  church  fathers: 
Luke,  Paul,  Augustine;   not:   St.  Luke,  St.  Paul,  etc. 

109.  In  references  to  Scripture  passages,  the  books  of 
the  Bible  and  of  the  Apocrypha,  and  versions  of  the 
Bible  commonly  referred  to,  as  follows: 

OLD   TESTAMENT 


Gen. 

Esther 

Hos. 

Exod. 

Job 

Joel 

Lev. 

Ps.  (Pss.) 

Amos 

Num. 

Prov. 

Obad. 

Deut. 

Eccles. 

Jonah 

Josh. 

Song  of  Sol.  (or 

Mic. 

Judg. 

Cant.) 

Nah. 

Ruth 

Isa. 

Hab. 

I  and  II  Sam. 

Jer. 

Zeph. 

I  and  II  Kings 

Lam. 

Hag. 

I  and  II  Chron. 

Ezek. 

Zech. 

Ezra 

Dan. 

Mai. 

Neh. 

NEW  TESTAMENT 

Matt. 

Gal. 

Philem. 

Mark 

Eph. 

Heb. 

Luke 

Phil. 

Jas. 

John 

Col. 

I  and  II  Pet. 

Acts 

I  and  II  Thess. 

I,  II,  and  III  John 

Rom. 

I  and  II  Tim. 

Jude 

I  and  II  Cor. 

Titus 

Rev. 

APOCRYPHA    (APOC.) 

I  and  II  Esd. 

Wisd.  of  Sol. 

Sus. 

Tob.=Tobit 

Ecclus. 

Bel  and  Dragon 

Jud.=  Judith 

Bar. 

Pr.  of  Man. 

Rest  of  Esther 

Song  of  Three 

I,  II,  III,  and  IV 

Children 

Mace. 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING  41 

VERSIONS  OF  THE  BIBLE  COMMONLY  REFERRED  TO 

A.V.         =  Authorized  Version. 

R.V.         =  Revised  Version. 

R.V.m.     =  Revised  Version,  margin. 

A.R.V.     =  American  Standard  Revised  Version. 

A.R.V.m.= American  Standard  Revised  Version,  margin. 

E.R.V.     =  English  Revised  Version. 

E.R.V.m.= English  Revised  Version,  margin. 

E.V.         =  English  Version  of  the  Bible. 

Vulg.       =  Vulgate. 

LXX        =  Septuagint. 

no.  In  literary  references,  in  footnotes  and  matter  of  a 
bibliographical  character,  " volume,"  "number," 
"psalm,"  "division,"  "chapter,"  "article,"  "sec- 
tion," "page,"  "column,"  "verse,"  "line,"  "note," 
"figure,"  followed  by  their  number  (see  37  and 
237);  and  the  word  "following"  after  the  number 
to  denote  continuance: 

Vol.  I  (plural,  Vols.),  No.  i  (Nos.),  Ps.  20  (Pss.),  Div.  HI, 
chap,  ii  (chaps.),  art.  iii  (arts.),  sec.  4  (sees.),  p.  5  (pp.), 
col.  6  (cols.),  vs.  7  (vss.),  1.  8  (11.),  n.  9  (nn.),  Fig.  7  (Figs.) ; 
PP-  S~7  (= pages  5  to  7  inclusive),  pp.  5  f.  (=page  5  and  the 
following  page),  pp.  5fT.  (=page  5  and  the  following 
pages). 

ill.  The  common  designations  of  weights  and  measures 
in  the  metric  system,  as  well  as  the  symbols  of  meas- 
urement in  common  use,  when  following  a  numeral: 
i  m.,  2  dm.,  3  cm.,  4  mm.;  c.m.  (= cubic  meter),  c.d.,  c.c., 
c.mm.;  gm.  (=gram);  gr.  (=grain);  h.  (=hour),  min. 
(=minute),  sec.  (=second);  Ib.  (=pound),  oz.  (=ounce); 
yd.,  ft.,  in.;  A  (  =  angstrom  units),  H.P.  (= horse-power), 
C.  (= centigrade),  F.  (= Fahrenheit),  and  L,C-M.  (= lowest 
common  multiple),  etc.  (See  123.) 


42  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

GENERAL  RULES — 

112.  In  extracts  from  modern  authors  whose  spelling  and 
punctuation  differ  but  slightly  from  ours,  and  where 
such  variations  do  not  affect  the  meaning,  use  office 
style.     In  citations  from  Old  English  works,  and 
in  cases  where  it  appears  to  be  essential  to  the 
writer's  plan  or  the  requirements  of  the  context  to 
give  a  faithful  rendering,  follow  the  original  copy. 
Titles  should  always  be  accurately  quoted. 

113.  Form  the  possessive  of  proper  names  ending  in  s  or 
another  sibilant,   if  monosyllabic,   by   adding  an 
apostrophe  and  s;  if  of  more  than  one  syllable,  by 
adding  an  apostrophe  alone: 

King  James's  Version,  Burns's  poems,  Marx's  theories; 
Moses'  law,  Jesus'  birth,  Demosthenes'  orations,  Berlioz' 
compositions;  for  convenience'  sake. 

But  in  the  case  of  proper  names  ending  in  a  silent 
sibilant,  the  possessive  is  formed  by  the  addition 
of  the  apostrophe  and  s,  whether  the  word  is 
monosyllabic  or  not: 
Charlevoix's  discoveries,  Des  Moines's  population. 

114.  Before  sounded  h,  long  u  (or  eu),  and  the  words 
"one,"  "once,"  use  "a"  as  the  form  of  the  indefinite 
article: 

a  hotel,  a  harmonic  rendition,  a  historical  work,  a  union, 
a  euphonious  word,  such  a  one. 

115.  The  ligatures  <z  and  ce  are  not  used  at  the  present 
day,  either  in  Latin  and  Greek  words,  or  in  words 
adopted  into  English  from  these  languages.    In 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING  43 

English  these  words  are  written  either  with  ae,  oe, 
separately,  or  with  e  alone.  The  ligature  is  re- 
tained, however,  in  Old  English,  and  in  French: 

aetas;  Oedipus  Tyrannus;  aesthetic;  (but:  oeuvre, 
French);  but:  maneuver;  Alfred  (Alfred  in  English). 

116.  Differentiate  "farther"  and  "further"  by  using  th 
former  in  the  sense  of  "more  remote,"  "at  a  greater 
distance";    the  latter  in  the  sense  of  "moreover," 
"in  addition": 

the  farther  end;  he  went  still  farther;  further,  he  suggested;  a 
further  reason. 

117.  In  forms  of  address  (vocative)  use  the  "O"  without 
a  comma  following;  for  an  exclamation  use  "Oh," 
followed  by  a  comma  or  an  exclamation  point 
(see  40) : 

"O  thou  most  mighty  ruler!"  "Oh,  why  did  not  Cerberus 
drag  me  back  to  hell?" 

118.  The  following  participles  retain  the  final  e  in  the 
primary  word: 

agreeing  hieing  singeing 

dyeing  hoeing  tingeing 

eyeing  shoeing  vieing 

The  following  participles  illustrate  those  that  omit 
the  e  before  the  terminal: 


abridging 

changing 

judging 

acknowledging 

encouraging 

mistaking 

aging 

glazing 

moving 

arguing 

gluing 

organizing 

awing 
biting 

grudging 
icing 

owing 
trudging 

bluing 

issuing 

truing 

44 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


119.  Spell: 

abridgment 

chlorid 

fetish 

Koran 

accouter 

chock-full 

fiber 

labeled 

acknowledgment  clamor 

flavor 

labor 

adz 

clinch 

fluorid 

lacquer 

aegis 

clue 

focused 

leukocyte 

Aeolian 

coeval 

forward 

leveled 

aesthetic 

color 

fulfil 

libeled 

afterward 

controller1 

fulness 

liter 

almanac 

cotillion 

gaiety 

loath 

aluminum 

councilor 

gild 

lodgment 

ambassador 

counselor 

gipsy 

Lukan 

amid 

cozy 

glamor 

maneuver 

among 

cue 

glycerin 

Markan 

anemia 

defense 

goodbye 

marshaled 

appareled 

demarkation 

graveled 

marvelous 

arbor 

demeanor 

gray 

meager 

archaeology 

descendant  (n.) 

gruesome 

mediaeval 

ardor 

dieresis 

guarantee  (v.) 

meter 

armor 

diarrhea 

guaranty  (n.) 

miter 

ascendency 

disheveled 

harbor 

modeled 

Athenaeum 

disk 

hematoxylin 

Mohammedan 

ax 

dispatch 

hemorrhage 

mold 

aye 

distil 

Hindu 

molt 

bark  (vessel) 

downward 

honor 

moneyed 

barreled 

draft 

imbed 

movable 

bazaar 

drought 

impaneled 

mustache 

behavior 

dueler 

imperiled 

neighbor 

biased 

dulness 

incase 

odor 

blessed 

dwelt 

inclose 

offense 

bowlder 

embitter 

incrust 

outward 

burned 

emir 

incumbrance 

oxid 

caesura 

employee 

indorse 

paean 

caliber 

encyclopedic 

infold 

paleography 

canceled 

endeavor 

ingraft 

paleontology 

candor 

engulf 

instal 

paneled 

cannoneer 

enrol 

instil 

parceled 

canyon 

ensnare 

insure 

parole 

carcass 

envelope  (n.) 

intrench 

parquet 

caroled 

enwrapped 

intrust 

partisan 

castor  (roller) 

equaled 

inward 

peddler 

ca  viler 

Eskimo 

jeweled 

penciled 

center 

exhibitor 

Judea 

Phoenix 

check 

fantasy 

judgment 

pigmy 

chiseled 

favor 

kidnaper 

plow 

1  In  official  publications  of  the  University  of  Chicago  "comptroller.' 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  SPELLING 


45 


practice 

rumor 

subpoena 

traveler 

(n.  and  v.) 

saber 

subtle 

trousers 

pretense 

salable 

succor 

trunkated 

primeval 

Savior 

sumac 

tumor 

program 

savor 

syrup 

upward 

quarreled 

scepter 

taboo 

valor 

raveled 

sepulcher 

talc 

vapor 

reconnoiter 

sergeant 

theater 

vendor 

reinforce 

skepticism 

thraldom 

vigor 

rencounter 

skilful 

thrash 

whiskey 

reverie 

smolder 

tormentor 

wilful 

rigor 

somber 

toward 

woeful 

rivaled 

specter 

trammeled 

woolen 

riveted 
ruble 

staunch 
steadfast 

tranquilize 
tranquillity 

worshiper 
Yahweh 

NOTE. — Make  one  word  of  "  anyone,"  "  someone,"  "everyone," 
"today,"  "tomorrow,"  "tonight,"  "cannot"  (see  204). 
Distinguish  between  "sometimes"  and  "some  time(s)." 

120.  Differentiate  between  the  terminations  -ise  and  -ize 
as  follows: 


SPELL  WITH 

-ise 

advertise 

comprise 

enterprise 

premise 

advise 

compromise 

excise 

reprise 

affranchise 

demise 

exercise 

revise 

appraise 

despise 

exorcise 

rise 

apprise  (to 

devise 

franchise 

supervise 

inform) 

disfranchise 

improvise 

surmise 

arise 

disguise 

incise 

surprise 

chastise 

emprise 

manuprise 

circumcise 

enfranchise 

merchandise 

SPELL  WITH  -ize  (-yze) 

aggrandize 

autolyze 

civilize 

energize 

agonize 

baptize 

classicize 

epitomize 

analyze 

brutalize 

colonize 

equalize 

anatomize 

canonize 

criticize 

eulogize 

anglicize 

catechize 

crystallize 

evangelize 

apologize 

catholicize 

demoralize 

extemporize 

apostrophize 

cauterize 

deputize 

familiarize 

apprize  (to 

centralize 

dogmatize 

fertilize 

appraise) 

characterize 

economize 

fossilize 

authorize 

christianize 

emphasize 

fraternize 

46 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


galvanize 

methodize 

polarize 

stigmatize 

generalize 

minimize 

professionalize 

subsidize 

gormandize 

modernize 

protestantize 

summarize 

harmonize 

monopolize 

pulverize 

syllogize 

hellenize 

moralize 

realize 

symbolize 

humanize 

nationalize 

recognize 

sympathize 

immortalize 

naturalize 

reorganize 

tantalize 

italicize 

neutralize 

revolutionize 

temporize 

jeopardize 

organize 

satirize 

tranquilize 

legalize 

ostracize 

scandalize 

tyrannize 

liberalize 

oxidize 

scrutinize 

utilize 

localize 

paralyze 

signalize 

vaporize 

magnetize 

particularize 

solemnize 

visualize 

manumize 

pasteurize 

soliloquize 

vitalize 

memorialize 

patronize 

specialize 

vocalize 

mesmerize 

philosophize 

spiritualize 

vulcanize 

metamorphize 

plagiarize 

standardize 

vulgarize 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  47 


PUNCTUATION 

121.  All  punctuation  marks  should  be  printed  in  the  same 
style  or  font  of  type  as  the  word,  letter,  or  character 
immediately  preceding  them: 

"With  the  cry  of  Banzai!  the  regiment  stormed  the  hill"; 
Luke  4:16(1;  No.  i. 

PERIOD — 

122.  A  period  is  used  to  indicate  the  end  of  a  complete 
sentence  (see  125). 

123.  Put  a  period  after  all  abbreviations,  except  in  cases 
where  a  mechanical  necessity  compels  the  omission 
of  a  letter  or  letters  in  the  middle  of  a  word  for  which 
there  is  no  recognized  abbreviated  form;  such  omis- 
sion is  indicated  by  an  apostrophe.    Treat  the  metric 
symbols  as  abbreviations,   but  not   the  chemical 
symbols,  nor  the  phrase  "per  cent,"  nor  the  format 
of  books: 

Macmillan  &  Co.,  Mr.  Smith,  St.  Paul,  No.  i,  Chas.  (see 
93)>  ibid.,  s.v.;  10  mm.;  but:  m'f'g  pl't  (= manufacturing 
plant);  O,  Fe;  2  per  cent  (see  94);  4to,  8vo. 

NOTE. — With  respect  to  symbols  for  measures  the  following 
exceptions  should  be  noted:  Astrophysical  Journal,  12  mm  (with 
thin  space  and  no  period)  (but:  2h3m4.s);  Botanical  Gazette, 
1 2  mm.,  1 25  ft.,  9  cc.  (on  line,  with  period). 

But  do  not  use  a  period,  in  technical  matter,  after  the 
recognized  abbreviations  for  linguistic  epochs,  or 


48  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

for  tides  of  well-known  publications  of  which  the 
initials  only  are  given,  nor  after  MS  (= manuscript) : 
IE  (=Indo-European),  OE  (= Old  English),  MHG  (= Middle 
High  German);  AJSL  (= American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures),  ZAW  (=Zeitschri]t  fiir  alttesta- 
meniliche  Wissenschaft),  CIL  (= Cor pus  Inscriptionum  Lati- 
norum). 

124.  Use  no  period  after  Roman  numerals,  even  if  having 
the  value  of  ordinals: 

Vol.  IV;  Louis  XVI  was  on  the  throne. 

125.  Omit  the  period  after  running-heads  (for  explanation 
of  this  and  the  following  terms  see  279-83);   after 
centered  headlines;  after  side-heads  set  in  separate 
lines;  after  cut-in  heads;  after  box-heads  in  tables; 
and  after  superscriptions  and  legends  which  do  not 
form  a  complete  sentence  (with  subject  and  predi- 
cate) ;  after  date  lines  at  top  of  communications,  and 
after  signatures  (see  50). 

126.  The  period  is  placed  inside  the  quotation  marks; 
and  inside  the  parentheses  when  the  matter  inclosed 
is  an  independent  sentence  and  forms  no  part  of 
the  preceding  sentence;  otherwise  outside: 

Tennyson's  "In  Memoriam."  Put  the  period  inside  the 
quotation  marks.  (This  is  a  rule  without  exception.)  When 
the  parentheses  form  part  of  the  preceding  sentence,  put 
the  period  outside  (as,  for  instance,  here). 

EXCLAMATION  POINT — 

127.  The  exclamation  point  is  used  to  mark  an  outcry,  or 

an  emphatic  or  ironical  utterance: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  49 

"Long  live  the  king!"  "Heaven  forbid!"  "Good!"  he 
cried;  "How  funny  this  seems!"  "This  must  not  be!"  The 
subject  of  his  lecture  was  "The  Thisness  of  the  That" !  The 
speaker  went  on:  "Nobody  should  leave  his  home  tomorrow 
without  a  marked  ballot  in  their  (!)  pocket." 

128.  The  exclamation  point  is  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks  or  parentheses  when  part  of  the  quotation 
or  parenthetical  matter;  otherwise  outside. 

See  illustrations  in  127. 

INTERROGATION  POINT — 

129.  The  interrogation  point  is  used  to  mark  a  query,  or 
to  express  a  doubt: 

"Who  is  this  ?"  The  prisoner  gave  his  name  as  Roger  Crown- 
inshield,  the  son  of  an  English  baronet  ( ? ). 

Indirect  questions,  however,  should  not  be  followed 
by  an  interrogation  point: 
He  asked  whether  he  was  ill. 

130.  The  interrogation  point  should  be  placed  inside  the 
quotation  marks  or  parentheses  only  when  it  is  a 
part  of  the  quotation  or  parenthetical  matter: 
The  question:    "Who  is  who,  and  what  is  what?"    Were 
you  ever  in  "Tsintsinnati"  ? 

COLON — 

131.  The  colon  is  used  to   "mark  a  discontinuity  of 
grammatical  construction  greater  than  that  indicated 
by  the  semicolon  and  less  than  that  indicated  by  the 
period.    It  is  commonly  used  (i)  to  emphasize  a 
close  connection  in  thought  between  two  clauses 
each  of  which  forms  a  complete  sentence,  and  which 


50  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

might  with  grammatical  propriety  be  separated  by 
a  period;  (2)  to  separate  a  clause  which  is  gram- 
matically complete  from  a  second  which  contains 
an  illustration  or  amplification  of  its  meaning;  (3) 
to  introduce  a  formal  statement,  an  extract,  a  speech 
in  a  dialogue,  etc."  (Century  Dictionary)  (unless 
this  is  preceded  by  a  conjunction,  like  "that," 
immediately  connecting  it  with  what  goes  before). 
Before  the  quotation  of  a  clause  in  the  middle  of  a 
sentence  use  a  comma: 

(i)  "This  argument  undeniably  contains  some  force:  Thus 
it  is  well  known  that  .  .  .  ."  "The  secretion  of  the  gland 
goes  on  uninterruptedly:  this  may  account  for  the  condition 
of  the  organ."  "The  fear  of  death  is  universal:  even  the 
lowest  animals  instinctively  shrink  from  annihilation."  (2) 
"Most  countries  have  a  national  flower:  France  the  lily, 
England  the  rose,  etc."  "Lambert  pine:  the  gigantic  sugar 
pine  of  California."  (3)  "The  rule  may  be  stated  thus: 
.  .  .  ."  "We  quote  from  the  address:  .  .  .  ."  "Charles: 
'Where  are  you  going?'  George:  'To  the  mill-pond.'" 
But:  "He  stoutly  maintained  that  'the  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery'";  and:  "Declaring,  'The  letter  is  a  monstrous 
forgery,'  he  tried  to  wash  his  hands  of  the  whole  affair." 

132.  The  colon  thus  often  takes  the  place  of  an  implied 
"namely,"  "as  follows,"  "for  instance,"  or  a  similar 
phrase.  Where  such  word  or  phrase  is  used,  it 
should  be  followed  by  a  colon  if  what  follows  consists 
of  one  or  more  grammatically  complete  clauses; 
otherwise,  by  a  comma  (see  145) : 
"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though  not 
the  largest,  in  Europe:  Great  Britain  and  France";  but: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  51 

"This  is  true  of  only  two  nations — the  wealthiest,  though 
not  the  largest,  in  Europe — viz.,  Great  Britain  and  France." 
"He  made  several  absurd  statements.  For  example:.  ..." 
but:  "There  are  several  states  in  the  Union — for  instance, 
Kansas  and  Wyoming — which  .  .  .  ." 

133.  Put  a  colon  after  the  salutatory  phrase  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  letter,  and  after  the  introductory  remark 
of  a  speaker  addressing  the  chairman  or  the  audi- 
ence: 

MY  DEAR  MR.  BROWN:    (See  50.) 

Mr.  Chairman,  Ladies,  and  Gentlemen:     (See  64.) 

134.  Put  a  centered  colon  between  chapter  and  verse 
in   Scripture  passages,   and  between   hours   and 
minutes  in  time  indications: 

Matt.  2:5-13;  4:30  P.M. 

135.  Put  a  colon  between  the  place  of  publication  and  the 
publisher's  name  in  literary  and  bibliographical 
references : 

Clement  of  Alexandria  (London:  Macmillan),  II,  97. 

136.  The  colon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quotation 
marks,  unless  a  part  of  the  quotation: 

He  writes  under  the  head  of  "Notes  and   Comments": 
"Many  a  man  can  testify  to  the  truth  of  the  old  adage :"  etc. 

SEMICOLON — 

137.  A  semicolon  is  used  to  mark  the  division  of  a  sentence 
somewhat  more  independent  than  that  marked  by 
a  comma: 

"Are  we  giving  our  lives  to  perpetuate  the  things  that  the 
past  has  created  for  its  needs,  forgetting  to  ask  whether  these 


52  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

things  still  serve  today's  needs;  or  are  we  thinking  of  living 
men  ?"  "This  is  as  important  for  science  as  it  is  for  practice; 
indeed,  it  may  be  said  to  be  the  only  important  consideration." 
"It  is  so  in  war;  it  is  so  in  the  economic  life;  it  cannot  be 
otherwise  in  religion."  "In  Russia  the  final  decision  rests 
with  the  Czar,  advised  by  his  ministers;  in  most  constitutional 
countries,  indirectly  with  the  people  as  represented  in  parlia- 
ment; in  Switzerland  alone,  through  the  referendum,  directly 
with  the  electorate  at  large."  "This,  let  it  be  remembered, 
was  the  ground  taken  by  Mill;  for  to  him  'utilitarianism,' 
in  spite  of  all  his  critics  may  say,  did  not  mean  the  pursuit  of 
bodily  pleasure."  ("For"  in  such  cases  should  commonly  be 
preceded  by  a  semicolon.) 

138.  In  enumerations  use  a  semicolon  between  the  differ- 
ent links,  if  these  consist  of  more  than  a  few  words 
closely  connected,  and  especially  if  individual  clauses 
contain  any  punctuation  mark  of  less  value  than  a 
period,  or  an  exclamation  or  interrogation  point 
(unless  inclosed  in  parentheses),  yet  are  intimately 
joined  one  with  the  other,  and  all  with  the  sentence 
or  clause  leading  up  to  them,  for  instance  through 
dependence  upon  a  conjunction,  like  "that,"  pre- 
ceding them  (see  36): 

"The  membership  of  the  international  commission  was  made 
up  as  follows:  France,  4;  Germany,  5;  Great  Britain,  i 
(owing  to  a  misunderstanding,  the  announcement  did  not 
reach  the  English  societies  in  time  to  secure  a  full  quota  from 
that  country.  Sir  Henry  Campbell,  who  had  the  matter  in 
charge,  being  absent  at  the  time,  great  difficulty  was  experi- 
enced in  arousing  sufficient  interest  to  insure  the  sending  of 
even  a  solitary  delegate) ;  Italy,  3;  the  United  States,  7." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  53 

"The  defendant,  in  justification  of  his  act,  pleaded  that  (i) 
he  was  despondent  over  the  loss  of  his  wife;  (2)  he  was  out 
of  work;  (3)  he  had  had  nothing  to  eat  for  two  days;  (4)  he 
was  under  the  influence  of  liquor."  "Presidents  Hadley,  of 
Yale;  Eliot,  of  Harvard;  Butler,  of  Columbia;  and  Angell, 
of  Michigan." 

139.  In   Scripture   references   a   semicolon   is   used  to 
separate  passages  containing  chapters: 

Gen.  2:3-6,  9,  14;  3^75  chap.  5;  6:15. 

140.  The  semicolon  should  be  placed  outside  the  quota- 
tion marks  or  parentheses,  unless  a  part  of  the 
quotation  or  parenthetical  matter. 

COMMA — 

141.  The  comma  is  "used  to  indicate  the  smallest  inter- 
ruptions in  continuity  of  thought  or  grammatical 
construction,  the  marking  of  which  contributes  to 
clearness"  (Century  Dictionary): 

"Here,  as  in  many  other  cases,  what  is  sometimes  popularly 
supposed  to  be  orthodox  is  really  a  heresy,  an  exaggeration, 
a  distortion,  a  caricature  of  the  true  doctrine  of  the  church. 
The  doctrine  is,  indeed,  laid  down  by  an  authority  here  and 
there;  but,  speaking  generally,  it  has  no  place  in  the  stand- 
ards, creeds,  or  confessions  of  the  great  communions;  e.g., 
the  Apostles'  Creed,  the  Nicene  Creed,  the  canons  of  the  early 
ecumenical  councils,  the  Westminster  Confession,  the  Thirty- 
nine  Articles."  "Shakspere  and  other,  lesser,  poets."  "The 
books  which  I  have  read  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  I  return 
those  [only]  which  I  have  read);  but:  "The  books,  which  I 
have  read,  I  herewith  return"  (i.e.,  having  read  them  [all], 
I  now  return  them).  "Gossiping,  women  are  happy";  and: 


54  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

"Gossiping  women  are  happy."  "Of  these  four,  two  Ameri- 
cans and  one  Englishman  started";  and:  "Of  these,  four — 
two  Americans  and  two  Englishmen — started."  "The  suffer- 
ing, God  will  relieve."  "Behind,  her  'stage  mother'  stood 
fluttering  with  extra  wraps."  "Some  boys  and  girls  pre- 
maturely announce  themselves,  usually  in  uncomfortable, 
sometimes  in  bad,  ways." 

142.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  proper  nouns  belonging 
to  different  individuals  or  places: 

"To  John,  Smith  was  always  kind";  "To  America,  Europe 
awards  the  prize  of  mechanical  skill." 

143.  Put  a   comma  before   "and,"    "or,"   and    "nor" 
connecting  the  last  two  links  in  a  sequence  of  three 
or  more;  or  all  the  links  in  a  series  of  greater  length, 
or  where  each  individual  link  consists  of  several 
words;  always  put  a  comma  before  "etc.": 

Tom,  Dick,  and  Harry;  either  copper,  silver,  or  gold;  "He 
was  equally  familiar  with  Homer,  and  Shakespere,  and 
Moliere,  and  Cervantes,  and  Goethe,  and  Ibsen";  "Neither 
France  for  her  art,  nor  Germany  for  her  army,  nor  England 
for  her  democracy,  etc." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  where  "and,"  etc.,  serves 
to  connect  all  of  the  links  in  a  brief  and  close-knit 
phrase : 

"a  man  good  and  noble  and  true";  "I  do  not  remember  who 
wrote  the  stanza— whether  it  was  Shelley  or  Keats  or  Moore." 

144.  Ordinarily,  put  a  comma  before  and  after  clauses 
introduced  by  such  conjunctions  as  "and,"  "but," 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  55 

"if,"  "while,"  "as,"  "whereas,"  "since,"  "because," 
"when,"  "after,"  "although,"  etc.,  especially  if  a 
change  of  subject  takes  place: 

"When  he  arrived  at  the  railway  station,  the  train  had  gone, 
and  his  friend,  who  had  come  to  bid  him  goodbye,  had 
departed,  but  left  no  word.  As  the  next  train  was  not  due 
for  two  hours,  he  decided  to  take  a  ride  about  the  town, 
although  it  offered  little  of  interest  to  the  sightseer.  While 
he  regretted  his  failure  to  meet  his  friend,  he  did  not  go 
to  his  house." 

But  do  not  use  a  comma  before  clauses  introduced 
by  such  conjunctions  if  the  preceding  clause  is  not 
logically  complete  without  them;  nor  before  "if," 
"but,"  and  "though"  in  brief  and  close-welded 
phrases : 

"This  is  especially  interesting  because  they  represent  the  two 
extremes  and  because  they  present  differences  in  their  rela- 
tions"; "This  is  good  because  true";  "I  shall  agree  to  this 
only  if  you  accept  my  conditions";  "I  would  not  if  I  could, 
and  could  not  if  I  would";  "honest  though  poor";  "a  cheap 
but  valuable  book." 

145.  Such  conjunctions,  adverbs,  connective  particles,  or 
phrases  as  "now,"  "then,"  "however,"  "indeed," 
"therefore,"  "moreover,"  "furthermore,"  "never- 
theless," "though,"  "in  fact,"  "in  short,"  "for 
instance,"  "that  is,"  "of  course,"  "on  the  contrary," 
"on  the  other  hand,"  "after  all,"  "to  be  sure," 
"for  example,"  etc.,  should  be  followed  by  a  comma 
when  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  or 
clause  to  introduce  an  inference  or  an  explanation, 


56  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

and  should  be  placed  between  commas  when  wedged 
into  the  middle  of  a  sentence  or  clause  to  mark  off  a 
distinct  break  in  the  continuity  of  thought  or  struc- 
ture, indicating  a  summarizing  of  what  precedes, 
the  point  of  a  new  departure,  or  a  modifying,  restrict- 
ive, or  antithetical  addition,  etc.: 

"Indeed,  this  was  exactly  the  point  of  the  argument"; 
"Moreover,  he  did  not  think  it  feasible";  "Now,  the  question 
is  this:  .  .  .  ."  "Nevertheless,  he  consented  to  the  scheme"; 
"In  fact,  rather  the  reverse  is  true";  "This,  then,  is  my 
position:  ....";  "The  statement,  therefore,  cannot  be 
verified";  "He  thought,  however,  that  he  would  like  to 
try";  "That,  after  all,  seemed  a  trivial  matter";  "The 
gentleman,  of  course,  was  wrong." 

But  d-o  not  use  a  comma  with  such  words  when  the 
connection  is  logically  close  and  structurally  smooth 
enough  not  to  call  for  any  pause  in  reading;  with 
"therefore,"  "nevertheless,"  etc.,  when  directly 
following  the  verb;  with  "indeed"  when  directly 
preceding  or  following  an  adjective  or  another 
adverb  which  it  qualifies;  nor  ordinarily  with  such 
terms  as  "perhaps,"  "also,"  "likewise,"  etc.: 

"Therefore  I  say  unto  you  .  .  .  .";  "He  was  therefore 
unable  to  be  present";  "It  is  nevertheless  true";  "He  is 
recovering  very  slowly  indeed";  "He  was  perhaps  thinking 
of  the  future";  "He  was  a  scholar  and  a  sportsman  too." 

146.  A  comma  is  preferably  omitted  before  "rather"  in 
such  an  expression  as — 

"The  time-value  is  to  be  measured  in  this  way  rather  than 
by  the  time-equivalent  of  the  strata." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  57 

147.  If  among  several  adjectives  preceding  a  noun  the 
last  bears  a  more  direct  relation  to  the  noun  than  the 
others,  it  should  not  be  preceded  by  a  comma: 

"  the  admirable  political  institutions  of  the  country  " ;  "  a  hand- 
some, wealthy  young  man." 

148.  Participial  clauses,  especially  such  as  contain  an 
explanation  of  the  main  clause,  should  usually  be 
set  off  by  a  comma : 

"Being  asleep,  he  did  not  hear  him";  "Exhausted  by  a  hard 
day's  work,  he  slept  like  a  stone." 

149.  Put  a  comma  before  "not"  introducing  an  anti- 
thetical clause: 

"Men  addict  themselves  to  inferior  pleasures,  not  because 
they  deliberately  prefer  them,  but  because  they  are  the  only 
ones  to  which  they  have  access." 

150.  For  parenthetical,  adverbial,  or  appositional  clauses 
or  phrases   use   commas   to   indicate   structurally 
disconnected,  but  logically  integral,  interpolations; 
dashes  to  indicate  both  structurally  and  logically 
disconnected  insertions;  never  use  the  two  together 
(see  175): 

"Since,  from  the  naturalistic  point  of  view,  mental  states  are 
the  concomitants  of  physiological  processes  .  .  .  .";  "The 
French,  generally  speaking,  are  a  nation  of  artists";  "The 
English,  highly  democratic  as  they  are,  nevertheless  deem 
the  nobility  fundamental  to  their  political  and  social  systems." 
"There  was  a  time — I  forget  the  exact  date — when  these 
conditions  were  changed. 


58  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

151.  Use  a  comma  to  separate  two  identical  or  closely 
similar  words,  even  if  the  sense  or  grammatical  con- 
struction does  not  require  such  separation  (see  142) : 

"Whatever  is,  is  good";  "What  he  was,  is  not  known"; 
"The  chief  aim  of  academic  striving  ought  not  to  be,  to  be 
most  in  evidence";  "This  is  unique  only  in  this,  that  .  .  .  ." 

152.  In  adjectival  phrases,  a  complementary,  qualifying, 
delimiting,  or  antithetical  adjective  added  to  the 
main  epithet  preceding  a  noun  should  be  preceded 
and  followed  by  a  comma: 

"This  harsh,  though  perfectly  logical,  conclusion";  "The 
deceased  was  a  stern  and  unapproachable,  yet  withal  sym- 
pathetic and  kind-hearted,  gentleman";  "Here  comes  in  the 
most  responsible,  because  it  is  the  final,  office  of  the  teacher"; 
"The  most  sensitive,  if  not  the  most  elusive,  part  of  the 
training  of  children." 

153.  Two  or  more  co-ordinate  clauses  ending  in  a  word 
governing  or  modifying  another  word  in  a  following 
clause  should  be  separated  by  commas : 

".  .  .  .  a  shallow  body  of  water  connected  with,  but  well 
protected  from,  the  open  sea";  "He  was  as  tall  as,  though 
much  younger  than,  his  brother";  "The  cultivation  in  our- 
selves of  a  sensitive  feeling  on  the  subject  of  veracity  is  one  of 
the  most  useful,  and  the  enfeeblement  of  that  feeling  one  of 
the  most  hurtful,  things";  "This  road  leads  away  from, 
rather  than  toward,  your  destination." 

154.  Similarly,  use  a  comma  to  separate  two  numbers: 
"In  1905,  347  teachers  attended  the  convention";  November 
i,  1905.    (See  160.) 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  59 

*55-  A  comma  is  employed  to  indicate  the  omission,  for 
brevity  or  convenience,  of  a  word  or  words  the 
repetition  of  which  is  not  essential  to  the  meaning: 
"In  Illinois  there  are  seventeen  such  institutions;  in  Ohio, 
twenty- two;  in  Indiana,  thirteen" ;  "In  Lincoln's  first  cabinet 
Seward  was  secretary  of  state;  Chase,  of  the  treasury; 
Cameron,  of  war;  and  Bates,  attorney -general." 

Often,  however,  such  constructions  are  smooth 
enough  not  to  call  for  commas  (and  consequent 
semicolons) : 

"One  puppy  may  resemble  the  father,  another  the  mother, 
and  a  third  some  distant  ancestor." 

156.  A  direct  quotation,  maxim,  or  similar  expression, 
when  brief,  should  be  separated  from  the  preceding 
part  of  the  sentence  by  a  comma  (see  131) : 

"God  said,  Let  there  be  light." 

157.  Use  a  comma  before  "of"  in  connection  with  resi- 
dence or  position: 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Mclntyre,  of  Detroit,  Mich.;  President  Hadley, 
of  Yale  University. 

Exceptions  are  those  cases,  historical  and  political,  in 
which  the  place-name  practically  has  become  a  part 
of  the  person's  name,  or  is  so  closely  connected  with 
this  as  to  render  the  separation  artificial  or  illogical: 

Clement  of  Alexandria,  Philip  of  Anjou,  King  Edward  of 
England. 

158.  Do  not  use  a  comma  between  consecutive  pages  in 
literary  references,  but  use  the  en  dash  (see  173) ; 


60  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

an  exception  may,  however,  be  made  in  the  case  of 

scriptural  references: 

pp.  4,  7-8,  10;  Ezra  5:7-8  (or  Ezra  5:7,  8). 

159.  Put  a   comma  after  digits  indicating  thousands, 
except  when  used  as  a  date  or  in  a  page  reference: 
1,276,  10,419;  January,  1909;  p.  2461. 

NOTE. — Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use  a  comma  with  four  figures. 

1 60.  Separate  month  and  year,  and  similar  time  divisions 
by  a  comma: 

November,  1905;  New  Year's  Day,  1906. 

NOTE. — Astrophysical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  do  not 
use  a  comma  between  month  and  year. 

161.  Omit  the  comma,  in  signatures  and  at  the  beginning 
of  articles,  after  author's  name  followed  by  address, 
title,  or  position  in  a  separate  line,  or  after  address 
followed  by  a  date  line,  etc.: 

JAMES  P.  ROBINSON 

Superintendent  of  Schools,  Bird  Center,  HI. 
JAMES  P.  ROBINSON 

Superintendent  of  Schools 
BIRD  CENTER,  ILL. 
July  i,  1911 

162.  The  comma  is  always  placed  inside  the  quotation 
marks,  but  following  the  parentheses,  if  the  con- 
text requires  it  at  all. 

APOSTROPHE — 

163.  An  apostrophe  is  used  to  mark  the  omission  of  a 
letter  or  letters  in  the  contraction  of  a  word,  or  of 
figures  in  a  number: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  6l 

ne'er,  don't,  'twas,  "takin'  me  'at";  m'f'g;  the  class  of  '96. 
(See  123.) 

164.  The  possessive  case  of  nouns,  common  and  proper, 
is  formed  by  the  addition  of  an  apostrophe,  or 
apostrophe  and  s  (see  113): 

a  man's  word,  horses'  tails;  Scott's  Ivanhoe,  Jones's  farms, 
Themistocles'  era;  for  appearance'  sake. 

165.  The  plural  of  numerals,  and  of  rare  or  artificial  noun- 
coinages,  is  formed  by  the  aid  of  an  apostrophe  and 
s;  of  proper  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable  ending 
in  a  sibilant,  by  adding  an  apostrophe  alone  (mono- 
syllabic proper  names  ending  in  a  sibilant  add  es; 
others,  s] : 

in  the  IQOO'S;  in  two's  and  three's,  the  three  R's,  the 
Y.M.C.A.'s;  "these  I-just-do-as-I-please's";  "all  the  Tommy 
Atkins'  of  England"  (but:  the  Rosses  and  the  Macdougals); 
the  Pericles'  and  Socrates'  of  literature. 

QUOTATION    MARKS.     (See    section    on  "Quotations," 

74-9I-) 
DASHES — 

166.  A  dash  is  used  to  denote  "a  sudden  break,  stop,  or 
transition  in  a  sentence,  or  an  abrupt  change  in  its 
construction,   a  long  or  significant  pause,   or  an 
unexpected   or   epigrammatic   turn  of  sentiment" 
(John  Wilson) : 

"Do  we — can  we — send  out  educated  boys  and  girls  from  the 
high  school  at  eighteen  ? "  "The  Platonic  world  of  the  static, 
and  the  Hegelian  world  of  process — how  great  the  contrast!" 
"  'Process' — that  is  the  magic  word  of  the  modern  period"; 


62  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

"To  be  or  not  to  be— that  is  the  question";  "Christianity 
found  in  the  Roman  Empire  a  civic  life  which  was  implicated 
by  a  thousand  roots  with  pagan  faith  and  cultus — a  state 
which  offered  little." 

167.  Use  dashes  (rarely  parentheses — see  177)  for  par- 
enthetical clauses  which   are   both   logically  and 
structurally  independent  interpolations  (see  150): 

"This  may  be  said  to  be — but,  never  mind,  we  will  pass  over 
that";  "There  came  a  time — let  us  say,  for  convenience,  with 
Herodotus  and  Thucydides — when  this  attention  to  actions 
was  conscious  and  deliberate";  "If  it  be  asked — and  in  say- 
ing this  I  but  epitomize  my  whole  contention — why  the 
Mohammedan  religion  .  .  .  ." 

1 68.  A  clause  added  to  lend  emphasis  to,  or  to  explain  or 
expand,  a  word  or  phrase  occurring  in  the  main 
clause,  which  word   or  phrase  is  then  repeated, 
should  be  introduced  by  a  dash: 

"To  him  they  are  more  important  as  the  sources  for  history— 
the  history  of  events  and  ideas";  "Here  we  are  face  to  face 
with  a  new  and  difficult  problem— new  and  difficult,  that  is, 
in  the  sense  that  .  .  .  ." 

169.  Wherever  a  "namely"  is  implied  before  a  paren- 
thetical or  complementary  clause,  a  dash  should 
preferably  be  used  (see  132) : 

"These  discoveries — gunpowder,  printing-press,  compass, 
and  telescope — were  the  weapons  before  which  the  old  science 
trembled";  "But  here  we  are  trenching  upon  another  division 
of  our  field — the  interpretation  of  New  Testament  books." 

170.  In  sentences  broken  up  into  clauses,   the  final — 
summarizing — clause  should  be  preceded  by  a  dash : 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  63 

"Amos,  with  the  idea  that  Jehovah  is  an  upright  judge 
.  .  .  .  ;  Hosea,  whose  Master  hated  injustice  and  falsehood 
.  .  .  .  ;  Isaiah,  whose  Lord  would  have  mercy  only  on  those 
who  relieved  the  widow  and  the  fatherless — these  were  the 
spokesmen  .  .  .  ." 

171.  A  word  or  phrase  set  in  a  separate  line  and  succeeded 
by  paragraphs,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  which  it 
is  implied,  should  be  followed  by  a  dash : 

"I  recommend — 
"i.  That  we  kill  him. 
"2.  That  we  flay  him." 

172.  A  dash  should  be  used  in  connection  with  side-heads, 
whether  "run  in"  or  paragraphed: 

2.  The  language  of  the  New  Testament. — The  lexicons 
of  Grimm-Thayer,  Cremer,  and  others  .... 
NOTE. — The  above  has  been  taken  from  .... 

Biblical  Criticism  in  Other  Denominations— 

A  most  interesting  article  appeared  in  the  Expository 
Times  .... 

173.  Use  a  dash  in  place  of  the  word  "to"  connecting 
two  words  or  numbers: 

May-July,  1906  (en  dash);  May  i,  1905 — November  i,  1906 
(em  dash);  pp.  3-7  (en  dash);  Luke  3:6 — 5:2  (em  dash). 

In  connecting  consecutive  numbers,  omit  hundreds 
from  the  second  number — i.e.,  use  only  two  figures 
— unless  the  first  number  ends  in  two  ciphers,  in 
which  case  repeat;  if  the  next  to  the  last  figure  in 
the  first  number  is  a  cipher,  do  not  repeat  this  in  the 
second  number;  but  in  citing  dates  B.C.,  always 


64  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

repeat  the  hundreds  (because  representing  a  dimi- 
nution, not  an  increase)  (see  158) : 
1880-95,  pp.  113-16;  1900-1906,  pp.  102-7;  387-324  B.C. 

NOTE. — The  Astro  physical  Journal  and  Botanical  Gazette  re- 
peat the  hundreds:     1880-1895,  pp.  113-116. 

174.  Let  a  dash  precede  the  reference  (author,  title  of 
work,  or  both)  following  a  direct  quotation,  consisting 
of  at  least  one  complete  sentence,  in  footnotes  or 
cited  independently  in  the  text  (see  85)  : 

1  "I  felt  an  emotion  of  the  moral  sublime  at  beholding 
such  an  instance  of  civic  heroism." — Thirty  Years,  1, 379. 

The  green  grass  is  growing 

The  morning  wind  is  in  it, 
'Tis  a  tune  worth  the  knowing 

Though  it  change  every  minute. 

—Emerson,  "To  Ellen,  at  the  South." 

175.  A  dash  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  in  connection 
with  any  other  point,  except  a  period: 

"DEAR  SIR:  I  have  the  honor  .  .  .  .";  not:  "DEAR  SIR:— 
I  have  .  .  .  .";  "This — I  say  it  with  regret— was  not  done"; 
not:  "This, — I  say  it  with  regret, — was  .  .  .  ." 

PARENTHESES — 

176.  Place  between  parentheses  figures  or  letters  used  to 
mark  divisions  in  enumerations  run  into  the  text: 

"The  reasons  for  his  resignation  were  three:  (i)  advanced 
age,  (2)  failing  health,  (3)  a  desire  to  travel." 

If  such  divisions  are  paragraphed,  a  single  paren- 
thesis is  ordinarily  used  in  connection  with  a  lower- 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  65 

case  (italic)  letter;  a  period,  with  figures  and  capital 
(roman)  letters.  In  syllabi,  and  matter  of  a  similar 
character,  the  following  scheme  of  notation  and 
indention  should  ordinarily  be  adhered  to: 

A.  Under  the  head  of  .... 

I.  Under  .... 

1.  Under  .... 

a)  Under  .... 

(1)  Under  .... 

(a)  Under  .... 

a)  Under  .... 
/3)  Under  .... 

(b)  Under  .... 

(2)  Under  .... 

b)  Under  .... 

2.  Under  .... 

II.  Under  .... 

B.  Under  the  head  of  .... 

177.  Parentheses  should  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  paren- 
thetical clauses  (see  150  and  167)  unless  confusion 
might  arise  from  the  use  of  less  distinctive  marks,  or 
unless  the  content  of  the  clause  is  wholly  irrelevan 
to  the  main  argument : 

"He  meant — I  take  this  to  be  the  (somewhat  obscure)  sense 
of  his  speech — that  .  .  .  .";  "The  period  thus  inaugurated 
(of  which  I  shall  speak  at  greater  length  in  the  next  chapter) 
was  characterized  by  ....";  "The  contention  has  been 
made  (op.  cit.)  that  .  .  .  . " 

BRACKETS — 

178.  Brackets  are  used  (i)  to  inclose  an  explanation  or 
note,  (2)  to  indicate  an  interpolation  in  a  quotation, 


66  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

(3)  to  rectify  a  mistake,  (4)  to  supply  an  omission, 
and  (5)  for  parentheses  within  parentheses: 

(1)  l  [This  was  written  before  the  publication  of  Spencer's 
book. — EDITOR.] 

(2)  "These  [the  free-silver  Democrats]  asserted  that  the 
present  artificial  ratio  can  be  maintained  indefinitely." 

(3)  "As  the  Italian  [Englishman]  Dante  Gabriel  Ros- 
[s]etti  has  said, 

(4)  JohnRuskin.    By  Henry  Carpenter.    ["English  Men 
of  Letters,"  III.]    London:  Black,  1900. 

(5)  Grote,  the  great  historian  of  Greece  (see  his  History, 
I,  204  [second  edition]),  .... 

179.  Such  phrases  as  "To  be  continued,"  at  the  end,  and 
"Continued    from  .  .  .  ."    at    the    beginning,    of 
articles,  chapters,  etc.,  should  be  placed  between 
brackets,  centered,  and  set  in  italics  (see  73)  and  in 
type  reduced  in  size  in  accordance  with  the  rule 
governing  reductions  (see  86) : 

\Contmued  from  p.  320] 
[To  be  concluded] 

ELLIPSES — 

1 80.  Ellipses  are  used  to  indicate  the  omission,  from  a 
quotation,  of  one  or  more  words  not  essential  to 
the  idea  which  it  is  desired  to  convey,  and  also 
to  indicate  illegible  words,  mutilations,  and  other 
lacunae  in  a  document,  MS,  or  other  material  which 
is  quoted.    For  an  ellipsis  at  the  beginning,  in  the 
middle,  or  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  four  periods, 
separated  by  a  space  (en  quad),  should  ordinarily 
be   used,    except   in   very   narrow   measures    (in 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   PUNCTUATION  67 

French  three  only).  If  the  preceding  line  ends 
in  a  point,  this  should  not  be  included  in  the  four. 
Where  a  whole  paragraph,  or  paragraphs,  or,  in 
poetry,  a  complete  line,  or  lines,  are  omitted, 
insert  a  full  line  of  periods,  separated  by  em-  or 
2-em  quads,  according  to  the  length  of  the  line. 
But  the  periods  should  not  extend  beyond  the 
length  of  the  longest  type-line: 

The  point  ....  is  that  the  same  forces  ....  are  still 

the  undercurrents  of  every  human  life We  may  never 

unravel  the  methods  of  the  physical  forces;  ....  but  .... 

I  think  it  worth  giving  you  these  details,  because  it  is  a 
vague  thing,  though  a  perfectly  true  thing,  to  say  that  it  was 
by  his  genius  that  Alexander  conquered  the  eastern  world. 

His  army,  you  know,  was  a  small  one.  To  carry  a  vast 
number  of  men  .... 

....  he  sought  the  lumberer's  gang, 
Where  from  a  hundred  lakes  young  rivers  sprang; 

Through  these  green  tents,  by  eldest  nature  drest, 
He  roamed,  content  alike  with  man  and  beast. 

181.  An  ellipsis  should  be  treated  as  a  part  of  the  citation; 
consequently  should  be  inclosed  in  the  quotation 
marks  (see  178  [3]). 

HYPHENS— 

182.  A  hyphen  is  placed  at  the  end  of  a  line  terminating 
with  a  syllable  of  a  word,  the  remainder  of  which 
is  carried  to  the  next  line  (see  section  on  "  Divisions" ) 
and  between  many  compound  words. 


68  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

183.  Hyphenate  two  or  more  words  (except  proper  names 
forming  a  unity  in  themselves)  combined  into  one 
adjective  preceding  a  noun,  or  when  the  noun  is 
understood: 

so-called  Croesus,  well-known  author,  first-class  investment, 
better-trained  teachers,  high-school  course,  half-dead  horse, 
never-ceasing  strife,  much-mooted  question,  joint-stock  com- 
pany, English-speaking  peoples,  nineteenth-century  progress, 
white-rat  serum,  up-to-date  machinery,  four-year-old  boy, 
house-to-house  canvass,  go-as-you-please  fashion,  deceased- 
wife's-sister  bill;  the  feeble-minded  (person);  but:  New 
Testament  times,  Old  English  spelling,  an  a  priori  argument. 

Where  one  of  the  components  contains  more  than 
one  word,  an  en  dash  should  be  used  in  place  of  a 
hyphen: 

New  York-Chicago  freight  traffic,  Norwegian-German- 
Jewish  immigrant. 

But  do  not  connect  by  a  hyphen  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples with  adverbs  ending  in  "-ly";  nor  such 
combinations  as  the  above  when  following  the  noun, 
or  qualifying  a  predicate: 

highly  developed  species;  a  man  well  known  in  the  neighbor- 
hood; the  fly-leaf,  so  called;  "Her  gown  and  carriage  were 
strictly  up  to  date." 

184.  Hyphenate,  as  a  rule,  nouns  formed  by  the  combina- 
tion of  two  nouns  standing  in  objective  relation  to 
each  other — that  is,  one  of  whose  components  is 
derived  from  a  transitive  verb: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  69 

mind-reader,  story-teller,  fool-killer,  office-holder,  well-wisher 
property-owner;  hero-worship,  child-study;  wood-turning, 
clay-modeling. 

Exceptions  are  such  common  and  brief  compounds 

as — 

lawgiver,  taxpayer,  proofreader,  bookkeeper,  stockholder. 

185.  A  present  participle  united  (i)  with  a  noun  to  forma 
new  noun  with  a  meaning  different  from  that  which 
would  be  conveyed  by  the  two  words  taken  separately, 
(2)  with  a  preposition  used  absolutely  (i.e.,  not  gov- 
erning a  following  noun),  to  form  a  noun,  should 
have  a  hyphen: 

boarding-house,  dining-hall,  sleeping-room,  dwelling-place, 
printing-office,  walking-stick,  starting-point,  stepping-stone, 
stumbling-block,  working-man;  the  puttmg-in  or  taking-out 
of  a  hyphen. 

186.  As  a  general  rule,  compounds  of  "book,"  "house," 
"mill,"  "room,"  "shop,"  and  "work"  should  be 
printed  as  one  compact  word,  without  a  hyphen, 
when  the  prefixed  noun  contains  only  one  syllable, 
should  be  hyphenated  when  it  contains  two,  and 
should  be  printed  as  two  separate  words  when  it 
contains  three  or  more: 

handbook,   schoolbook,    notebook,    textbook;    pocket-book, 

story-book;  reference  book. 

boathouse,  clubhouse,  schoolhouse,  storehouse;  engine-house, 

power-house;  business  house. 

cornmill,  handmill,  sawmill,  windmill;  water-mill,  paper-mill; 

chocolate  mill. 


70  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

bedroom,  classroom,  schoolroom,  storeroom;    lecture-room; 
recitation  room. 

tinshop,  workshop;    bucket-shop,  tailor-shop;    policy  shop, 
handwork,  woodwork;   metal-work;  filigree  work. 

Exceptions  are  rare  combinations,  and  such  as  for 
appearance'  sake  would  better  be  separated: 
source-book,  wheat-mill,  school  work. 

187.  Compounds  of  "maker,"  "dealer,"  and  other  words 
denoting  occupation  should  ordinarily  be  hyphen- 
ated; likewise  nouns  denoting  different  occupations 
of  the  same  individual: 

harness-maker,  book-dealer,  job-printer  (see  184);  a  soldier- 
statesman,  the  poet-artist  Rossetti. 

Exceptions   are   a   few   short   words   of   everyday 
occurrence: 

bookmaker,  dressmaker. 

1 88.  Compounds  of  "store"  should  be  hyphenated  when 
the  prefix  contains  only  one  syllable;  otherwise  not: 

drug-store,  feed-store  (but:    bookstore);    grocery  store,  dry- 
goods  store. 

189.  Compounds  of  "fellow"  are  always  hyphenated: 
fellow-man,  fellow-beings,  play-fellow. 

190.  Compounds    of    "father,"    "mother,"    "brother," 
"sister,"  "daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster"  should 
be  hyphenated  when  forming  the  first  element  of 
the  compound: 

father-love  (but:   fatherland),  mother- tongue,  brother-officer, 
sister-nation,  foster-son,  daughter-cells,  parent-word. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  71 

191.  Compounds  of  "great,"  indicating  the  fourth  degree 
in  a  direct  line  of  descent,  call  for  a  hyphen: 
great-grandfather,  great-grandson. 

192 .  Compounds  of  "  life ' '  and  "  world  "  require  a  hyphen : 
life-history,  life-principle  (but:  lifetime),  world-power,  world- 
problem. 

193.  Compounds  of  "skin"  with  words  of  one  syllable 
are  to  be  printed  as  one  word;  with  words  of  more 
than  one,  as  two  separate  words: 

calfskin,  sheepskin;  alligator  skin. 

194.  Compounds  of  "master"  should  be  hyphenated: 
master-builder,  master-stroke  (exception:  masterpiece). 

195.  Compounds    of    "god,"    when    this   word    forms 
the  second  element  of  the  compound,  should  be 
hyphenated : 

sun-god,  rain-god  (but:   godsend,  godson). 

196.  "Half,"   "quarter,"   etc.,  combined  with  a  noun 
should  be  followed  by  a  hyphen: 

half-truth,  half-tone,  half-year,  half-title,  quarter-mile. 

197.  "Semi-,"  "demi-,"  "bi-,"  "tri-,"  etc.,  do  not  ordina- 
rily demand  a  hyphen: 

semiannual,  demigod,  demiurge,  biweekly,  bipartisan,  bichro- 
mate, bimetallist,  trimonthly,  tricolor,  trifoliate. 

Exceptions  are  long  or  unusual  formations: 
semi-centennial,  demi-relievo. 


72  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

198.  Compounds  of  "self,"  when  this  word  forms  the 
first  element  of  the  compound,  are  hyphenated: 
self-evident,  self-respect  (see  119,  note). 

199.  Combinations  with  "fold"  are  to  be  printed  as  one 
word  if  the  number  contains  only  one  syllable;  if  it 
contains  more,  as  two: 

twofold,  tenfold;  fifteen  fold,  a  hundred  fold. 

200.  Adjectives  formed  by  the  suffixation  of  "like"  to 
a  noun  are  usually  printed  as  one  word  if  the  noun 
contains  only  one  syllable  (except  when  ending  in 
/);   if  it  contains  more  (or  is  a  proper  noun),  they 
should  be  hyphenated: 

childlike,    homelike,    warlike,    godlike;     eel-like,    bell-like; 
woman-like,  business-like;    American-like  (but:    Christlike). 

201.  "Vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and  "lieutenant," 
constituting  parts  of  titles,  should  be  connected 
with  the  chief  noun  by  a  hyphen: 

Vice-Consul  Taylor,  ex-President  Cleveland,  the  governor- 
elect,  the  postmaster-general,  a  lieutenant-colonel. 

2  02 .  Compounds  of ' '  by-, ' '  when  this  word  forms  the  first 
element  of  the  compound,  should  be  hyphenated: 
by-product,  by-laws. 

203.  The  prefixes  "  co-,"  " pre-,"  and  " re-,"  when  followed 
by  the  same  vowel  as  that  in  which  they  terminate, 
or  by  w  or  y,  take  a  hyphen;  but,  as  a  rule,  they 
do  not  when  followed  by  a  different  vowel  or  by  a 
consonant: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  73 

co-operation,  pre-empted,  re-enter,  co-worker,  re-yield; 
but:  coequal,  coeducation,  prearranged,  reinstal;  cohabita- 
tion, prehistoric,  recast  (re-read). 

NOTE. — The  Botanical  Gazette  prints:  cooperate,  reenter,  etc. 

Exceptions  are  combinations  with  proper  names,  long 
or  unusual  formations,  and  words  in  which  the 
omission  of  the  hyphen  would  convey  a  meaning 
different  from  that  intended  (cf .  9,  19,  208) : 
pre-Raphaelite,  re-tammanize;  re-postpone,  re-pulverization; 
re-formation  (as  distinguished  from  reformation),  re-cover 
(= cover  again),  re-creation. 

204.  Omit    the    hyphen    from    "today,"    "tomorrow," 
"tonight,"  " viewpoint,"  "standpoint."     (See  119.) 

205.  The  negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  and  "a-"  do 
not  usually  require  a  hyphen: 

unmanly,  undemocratic,  inanimate,  indeterminate,  illimitable 
impersonal,  asymmetrical. 

Exceptions  would  be  rare  and  artificial  combinations. 
The  particle  "non-,"  on  the  contrary,  ordinarily  calls 
for  a  hyphen,  except  in  the  commonest  words: 
non-aesthetic,  non-subservient,  non-contagious,  non-ability, 
non-interference,  non-unionist,  non-membership;  but:  nonage, 
nondescript,  nonessential,  nonplus,  nonsense,  noncombatant. 

206.  "  Quasi-"  prefixed  to  a  noun  or  an  adjective  requires 
a  hyphen: 

quasi-corporation,  quasi-historical. 

207.  "Over"  and  "under"  prefixed  to  a  word  should  not 
be  followed  by  a  hyphen,  except  in  unusual  cases; 


74  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

overbold,  overemphasize,  overweight,  underfed,  underestimate, 
undersecretary;  but:  over-soul,  under-man,  over-spiritualistic. 

208.  The  Latin  prepositions   "ante,"   "anti,"   "inter," 
"intra,"  "post,"  "sub,"  and  "super"  prefixed  to  a 
word  do  not  ordinarily  require  a  hyphen : 

antedate,  antechamber,  antediluvian,  antidote,  antiseptic  (but: 
anti-imperialistic— cf.  203),  international,  interstate,  inter- 
city, intramural  (but:  intra-atomic),  postscript,  postgradu- 
ate, postprandial,  subconscious,  submarine,  subtitle,  subway, 
superfine. 

Exceptions  are  such  formations  as — 

ante-bellum,  ante-Nicene,  anti-Semitic,  inter-university,  post- 
revolutionary. 

209.  "Extra,"  "infra,"  "pan,"  "supra,"  and  "ultra" 
as  a  rule  call  for  a  hyphen : 

extra-hazardous,  infra-mundane,  pan-Hellenic,  supra- 
temporal,  ultra-conservative  (but:  Ultramontane). 

210.  In  fractional  numbers,  spelled  out,  connect  by  a 
hyphen  the  numerator  and  the  denominator,  unless 
either  already  contains  a  hyphen: 

"The  year  is  two-thirds  gone";  four  and  five-sevenths; 
thirty-hundredths;  but:  thirty-one  hundredths. 

But  do  not  hyphenate  in  such  cases  as — 

"One  half  of  his  fortune  he  bequeathed  to  his  widow;  the 
other,  to  charitable  institutions." 

211.  In  the  case  of  two  or  more  compound  words  occurring 
together,  which  have  one  of  their  component  elements 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  PUNCTUATION  75 

in  common,  this  element  is  frequently  omitted  from 
all  but  the  last  word,  and  its  implication  should  be 
indicated  by  a  hyphen : 

in  English-  and  German-speaking  countries;  one-,  five-,  and 
ten-cent  pieces;  "If  the  student  thinks  to  find  this  character 
where  many  a  literary  critic  is  searching— in  fifth-  and  tenth- 
century  Europe — he  must  not  look  outside  of  manuscript  tra- 
dition." 

NOTE. — Some  writers  regard  this  hyphen  as  an  objectionable 
Teutonism. 

212.  A  hyphen  is  used  to  indicate  a  prefix  or  a  suffix,  as  a 
particle  or  syllable,  not  complete  in  itself: 

"The  prefix  a-";  "The  German  diminutive  suffixes  -chen 
and  -lein." 

213.  A  hyphen  is  employed  to  indicate  the  syllables  of  a 
word: 

di-a-gram,  pho-tog-ra-phy. 

214.  Following  is  a  list  of  words  of  everyday  occurrence 
which  should  be  hyphenated,  and  which  do  not  fall 
under  any  of  the  above  classifications: 

after-years  cross-section  man-of-war  son-in-law 

bas-relief  death-rate  object-lesson  subject-matter 

birth-rate  folk-song  page-proof  thought-process 

blood-relations  food-stuff  pay-roll  title-page 

coat-of-arms  fountain-head  poor-law  wave-length 

common-sense  guinea-pig  post-office  well-being 

cross-examine  horse-power  sea-level  well-nigh 

cross-reference  loan-word  sense-perception  will-power 


76  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DIVISIONS 

215.  Avoid  all  unnecessary  divisions  of  words.    Wherever 
consistent  with  good  spacing,  carry  the  whole  word 
over  into  the  next  line. 

216.  Do  not,  in  wide  measures  (20  ems  or  more),  divide 
on  a  syllable  of  two  letters,  if  possible  to  avoid  it. 
Never  carry  over  a  syllable  of  two  letters.     Good 
spacing,  however,  is  paramount.     Words  of  four 
letters — like  on-ly — should  never  be  divided;  words 
of  five  or  six — like  oc-cur,  of-fice,  let-ter — rarely. 

217.  Never  let  more  than  two  consecutive  lines  termi- 
nate in  a  hyphen,  if  at  all  avoidable.    The  next  to 
the  last  line  in  a  paragraph  ought  not  to  end  in  a 
divided  word;   and  the  last  line  (the  "breakline") 
should,  in  measures  of  15  ems  and  up,  contain  at 
least  four  letters.     Similarly,  try  to  avoid  a  divided 
word  at  the  bottom  of  a  right-hand  (recto)  page. 

218.  Do  not  divide  proper  nouns,  especially  names  of 
persons,  unless  absolutely  necessary. 

219.  Do  not  separate    (i.e.,  put  in  different  lines)   the 
initials  of  a  name,  or  such  combinations  as  A.D., 
P.M.,  etc. 

220.  Avoid  the  separation  of  a  divisional  mark,  e.g.,  (a) 
or  (i),  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  from  the  section 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  DIVISIONS  77 

which  it  precedes;  i.e.,  do  not  allow  such  mark  to 
fall  at  the  end  of  a  line,  but  carry  it  over  with  the 
matter  to  which  it  pertains. 

221.  Divide  according  to  pronunciation  (the  American 
system),  not  according  to  derivation  (the  English 
system) : 

democ-racy,not:  demo-cracy;  knowl-edge,  not:  know-ledge; 
aurif-erous,  not:  auri-ferous;  antip-odes  (still better:  antipo- 
des— see  224),  not:  anti-podes. 

As  far  as  is  compatible  with  pronunciation  and  good 
spacing,  however,  divide  compounds  on  etymologi- 
cal lines,  or  according  to  derivation  and  meaning: 
dis-pleasure  is  better  than  displeas-ure;  school-master, 
than  schoolmas-ter. 

Shun  such  monstrosities  as — 
Passo-ver,  diso-bedience,  une-ven,  disa-bled. 

222.  When  two  consonants  meet  between  vowels,  and 
the  syllable  ends  on  one  consonant,  the  division 
may  properly  be  made  between  the  consonants,  the 
pronunciation  determining  the  place  of  division: 

advan-tage,  exces-sive,  finan-cier,  foun-da-tion,  impor-tant, 
In-dian,  moun-tain,  profes-sor,  struc-ture. 

223.  Do  not  terminate  a  line  in  a  soft  c  or  gy  or  in  a  j. 
Escape  the  division  entirely,  if  possible;  if  not  pos- 
sible, divide: 

pro-cess,  not:  proc-ess;  ne-cessary,  not:  nec-essary;  spa- 
cing, not:  spac-ing  (the  rule  being  that  in  present  parti- 


78  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

ciples  the  -ing  should  be  carried  over);  pro-geny,  not: 
prog-eny;  pre-judice,  not:  prej-udice. 

NOTE. — This  rule  differs  from  that  followed  by  Webster  and 
other  dictionaries. 

224.  Divide  on  a  vowel  wherever  practicable.    In  case  a 
vowel  alone  forms  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
run  it  into  the  first  line: 

sepa-rate,  not:  sep-arate;  particu-lar,  not:  partic-ular; 
criti-cism,  not:  crit-icism. 

Exceptions  are  words  in  -able  and  -ible,  which  should 

carry  the  vowel  over  into  the  next  line: 

read-able,  not:   reada-ble;  convert-ible,  not:   converti-ble. 

225.  In  hyphenated  nouns  and  adjectives  avoid  additional 
hyphens: 

object-lesson,  not:  object-les-son;  fellow-being,  not:  fel- 
low-being; poverty-stricken,  not:  pov-erty-stricken,  much 
less:  pover-ty-stricken. 

226.  A  coalition  of  two  vowel-sounds  into  one  (i.e.,  a 
diphthong)  should  be  treated  as  one  letter.    There- 
fore do  not  divide: 

peo-ple  (either  syllable  makes  a  bad  division),  Cae-sar 
(cf.  218),  bu-ilding. 

227.  In  derivatives  from  words  ending  in  t,  the  /,  in 
divisions,  should  be  carried  into  the  next  line  with 
the  suffix  if  the  accent  has  been  shifted;  if  the  deriva- 
tive has  retained  the  accent  of  the  parent-word, 
the  /  should  be  left  in  the  first  line : 

objec-tive  (from  ob'ject);  defect-ive  (from  defect');  but: 
respec-tively,  distinc-tive. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  DIVISIONS  79 

228.  The  addition  of  a  plural  5,  adding  a  new  syllable 
to  words  ending  in  an  s-sound,  does  not  create  a 
new  excuse  for  dividing  such  words: 

hor-ses  and  circumstan-ces  are  impossible  divisions. 

229.  Adjectives  in  -leal  should  be  divided  on  the  i: 
physi-cal,  not  phys-ical  nor  physic-al. 

230.  Do  not  divide  nothing. 

231.  The  following  are  condensed  rules  for  dividing 
words  in  the  foreign  languages  most  frequently  met 
with  in  proofreading.    While,  perhaps,  not  entirely 
comprehensive,  they  will  be  found  to  cover  every 
ordinary  contingency. 

FRENCH 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible,  avoiding  consonantal  end- 
ing of  syllables: 

in-di-vi-si-bi-li-te,    a-che-ter;     ta-bleau    (not:    tab-leau); 
ba-lancer  (not:  bal-ancer). 

b)  Two  consonants  of  which  the  second  is  /  or  r 
(but  not  the  combinations  rl,  Ir),  are  both  carried 
over  to  the  following  syllable: 

ta-bleau,  e-cri-vain,  per-dre,  qua-tre;  par-ler,  hur-ler. 

c)  There  are  as  many  syllables  as  there  are  vowels, 
even  if  soundless: 

par-lent,  vic-toi-re,  pro-pri-6-tai-re,  guer-re,  fil-les; 


So  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

but  a  mute  e  following  a  vowel  does  not  form  a 

syllable: 

6-taient,  joue-rai; 

and  i ,  y,  0,  ou,  u,  when  preceding  other  vowels,  are 
often  sounded  as  consonants,  and  then  do  not  form 
a  syllable: 
bien,  6-tions,  yeux,  loin,  fouet-ter,  e-cuel-le. 

GERMAN 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible: 

hii-ten,  le-ben,  Fa-brik. 

b)  If  several  consonants  stand  between  vowels, 
usually  only  the  last  is  carried  over: 

Rit-ter,  klir-ren,  Klemp-ner,  Ver-wand-te,  Karp-fen. 

c)  sz,  ch,  sch,  ph,  st,  th  are  never  separated  (but  see 
/)  below): 

Bu-sze,  Be-cher,  Ha-scher  (but:  Haus-chen),  Geo-gra-phie, 
La-sten,  Ma-thilde. 

d)  If  ck  must  be  divided,  it  is  separated  into  k-k: 
Deckel— Dek-kel. 

e)  In  foreign  words  (Fremdworter) ,  combinations  of 
bj  d,  gj  k,  p,  t,  with  /  or  r  are  carried  over: 
Pu-bli-kum,  Me-trum,  Hy-drant. 

/)  Compound  words  are  separated  first  into  their 
component  elements,  and  within  each  element  the 
foregoing  rules  apply: 
Fursten-schlosz,  Tiir-an-gel,  Inter-esse. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   DIVISIONS  8l 

ITALIAN 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible: 

ta-vo-li-no,  nar-ra-re. 

b)  s  before  a  consonant,  r  following  a  consonant, 
ch,  gh,  gli  (g/),  gn,  qu,  sc,  cl,  fl,  gl,  pi  are  never 
separated: 

ca-sti-ghi,  a-vro,  mi-glio-re,  bi-so-gno,  in-chi6-stro,  u-scire. 

c)  i=y  and  u=w  go  with  the  following  vowel; 
ac,  au,  ei,  eu,  oi  are  not  separated: 

mi£i,  tu6i. 

SPANISH 

a)  The  fundamental  principle  is  to  divide  on  a 
vowel  as  far  as  possible: 

ca-ra-co-les,  re-ba-iio,  fle-xi-bi-li-dad. 

b)  ch,  II,  rr,  and  n,  being  regarded  as  simple  con- 
sonants, follow  the  foregoing  rule;  cc  and  nn  are 
divided,  as  in  English: 

mu-cha-cho,  ba-ta-lla,  bu-116,  ba-rre-no,  ci-ga-rro;  ac-ce-so, 
en-no-ble-cer,  in-ne-ga-ble. 

c)  The  liquid  consonants  /  and  r,  when  preceded  by 
any  consonant  other  than  s,  must  not  be  separated 
from  that  consonant,  except  in  uniting  parts  of 
compound  words: 

ha-blar,  po-dria,  ce-le-bra-ci-on,  si-glo;    but  sub-lu-nar, 
sub-ra-yar,  es-la-bon. 

d)  Two  separable  consonants  should  be  divided; 
s  is  always  disjoined  from  a  following  consonant: 
cuer-da,  chas-co,  pron-to;  has-ta,  as-pi-rar,  cons-pi-rar. 


82  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

GREEK 

a)  Single  consonants,  combinations  of  consonants 
which  can  begin  a  word,  and  mutes  followed  by  p 
or  v  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable : 

€-X°>>  e-yw,  e-<T7re-pa,  ve-KTap,  d-K/XT/,  8c-op/>ios,  /u-Kpov,  irpa- 
y/Aa-ros,  yi-yva)-frKa>. 

Other  combinations  of  consonants  are  divided: 

7rpcur-(r<o,  eX-Trts,  ev-8ov,  ap-tta-ra. 

6)  Compound  words  are  divided  into  their  original 
parts ;  subject  to  that  the  foregoing  rule  applies : 

7rpo(7-a-ya>,  irap-a-yco. 

LATIN 

a)  A  Latin  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has 
vowels  or  diphthongs  (ae,  au,  oe,  eiy  eu,  ui). 

b)  When  a  single  consonant  occurs  between  two 
vowels,  divide  before  the  consonant: 

Cae-sar,  me-ri-di-es. 

c)  In  the  case  of  two  or  more  consonants  divide 
before  the  last  consonant,  except  in  the  combina- 
tions: mute  (p,  ph,  b,  t,  th,  d,  c,  ch,  g)+liquid  (/,  r), 
and  qu  or  gu: 

om-nis,  scrip-tus,  cunc-tus  (but:  pa-tris,  e-quus,  lin-gua). 

d)  Compound  words  are  separated  first  into  their 
component  elements,  and  within  each  element  the 
foregoing  rules  apply: 

ad-est,  ab-rum-po,  red-e-o,  trans-i-go. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  FOOTNOTES  83 


FOOTNOTES 

232.  For  reference  indices,  as  a  rule,  use  superior  figures. 
Only  in  special  cases  should  asterisks,  daggers,  etc., 
be  employed  (see  234);   for  instance,  in  tabular  or 
algebraic  matter,  where  figures  would  be  likely  to 
cause  confusion.    Index  figures  in  the  text  should  be 
placed  after  the  punctuation  marks,  without  space, 
except  in  German,  where  they  are  placed  inside: 
....  the  niceties  of  style  which  were  then  invading  Attic 
prose,1  and  which  made  .... 

1  In  particular  the  avoidance  of  hiatus. 
F^yt+yS-* 

,  *  Schenk's  equation. 

When  figures  are  not  used,  the  sequence  of  indices 
should  be: 

*  ("asterisk"  or  "star"),  f  ("dagger"),  J  ("double  dagger"), 
§  ("section  mark"),  ||  ("parallels"),  H  ("paragraph  mark"). 

233.  Where  references  to  the  same  work  follow  each  other 
closely  and  uninterruptedly,   use  ibid,   instead  of 
repeating  the  title.    This  ibid,  takes  the  place  of  as 
much   of   the  previous  reference   as   is   repeated. 
Ibid,  should,  however,  not  ordinarily  be  used  for  the 
first  footnote  on  a  verso  (left-hand)  page;  it  is  better 
usage  either  to  repeat  the  title,  if  short,  or  to  use 
loc.  cit.  (when  reference  is  to  entire  citation)  or 
op.  cit.  (when  work  only  is  cited). 

*  Spencer,  Principles  of  Sociology,  chap.  iv.       3  Ibid.,  chap.  v. 

3  Ibid.  4  Spencer,  loc.  cit. 


84  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

234.  Footnotes  to  tables,  whether  the  tables  are  ruled  or 
open,  should  be  in  6-pt.,  and  should  invariably  be 
placed  at  the  foot  of  the  table  and  not  at  the  foot 
of  the  page.     For  reference  indices  in  such  cases 
use  asterisks,  etc.,  and  not  superior  figures   (see 
232). 

235.  If  the  author's  name  is  given  in  the  text  in  connec- 
tion with  a  reference  to,  or  a  quotation  from,  his 
work,  it  should  not  be  repeated  in  the  footnote: 

....  This  theory  is  questioned  by  Herbert,  as  follows: 
"I  cannot  admit  .  .  .  ,"x 

:    *  Laws  of  Ihf  Ancients,  I,  153. 

236.  It  is  better  to  place  the  index  figure  in  the  text  at 
the  end  of  the  quotation  (see  illustration  above). 

237.  Ordinarily,   omit   "Vol.,"    "chap.,"   and   "p."   in 
references  to  particular  passages.  Use  Roman  numer- 
als (capitals)  for  Volume,  Book,  Part,  and  Division, 
except    in   reference    to  ancient,   classical  authors 
or  works,  when  lower-case  roman  numerals  should 
be  used;  Roman  numerals  (lower-case)  for  chapter 
and  pages  of  introductory  matter  (Preface,  etc.) ;  and 
Arabic  numerals  for  number  (Heft)  and  text  pages. 
Only  when  confusion  would  be  liable  to  arise,  or  in 
exceptional  cases,  use  "  Vol.,"  "p.,"  etc.,  in  connection 
with  the  numerals;  but  where  the  reference  is  to  a 
page,  unaccompanied  by  further  details,  the  abbre- 
viation "p."  or  "pp."  must  of  course  be  used.    In 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  FOOTNOTES  85 

classical  references  use  no  comma  between  author's 
name  and  the  title  of  his  work;  and  no  comma  fol- 
lowing the  title,  unless  "Vol.,"  "p.,"  or  some  kin- 
dred symbol  is  used.  In  all  references  to  divisions 
of  classical  or  ancient  works,  use  periods  in  place  of 
commas,  reserving  the  comma  to  indicate  a  succes- 
sion (of  pages,  etc.) : 

i  Miller,  French  Rev.  (2d  ed.;  London:  Abrahams,  1888), 
II,  Part  IV,  iii. 

3  S.  I.  Curtiss,  "The  Place  of  Sacrifice  among  Primitive 
Semites,"  Biblical  World,  XXI  (1903),  248  ff. 

3  P.  63;  pp.  27-36. 

*  Cicero  De  ojfLciis  i.  133,  140. 

*De  div.  per  sown,  i,  p.  463(1. 

The  same  practice  prescribed  for  classical  references 
is  frequently  desired  by  authors  with  respect  to 
English  references,  and  may  with  equal  propriety 
be  followed: 

i  W.  W.  Greg  Pastoral  Poetry  and  Pastoral  Drama  (London 
1906)  114. 


238.  The  date  of  publication  in  a  reference  to  a  periodical  • 
should  immediately  follow  the  volume  number,  and 
should  be  put  in  parentheses  (see  above  illustration). 

239.  In  work  set  on  the  linotype  machine  footnotes  should 
be  numbered  consecutively  through  an  article,  in  a 
journal,  or  through  a  chapter,  in  a  book,  to  save 


86  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

resetting  in  case  of  change  (see  "Hints  to  Authors 
and  Editors,"  note  under  "Footnotes/'  p.  114). 

NOTE. — Exceptions  to  these  rules  are  footnotes  in  the  Botani- 
cal Gazette  and  the  Astro  physical  Journal,  which  have  adopted 
the  following  styles: 

Botanical  Gazette — 

1  LIVINGSTON,  B.  E.,  (i)  On  the  nature  of  the  stimulus  which 
causes  the  change  in  form  of  polymorphic  green  algae.  EOT. 
GAZ.  30:280-317.  1900. 

a  —  — ,  (2)  The  heredity  of  sex.  Bull.  Mus.  Comp.  Zool. 
40:187-218.  1903. 

Astro  physical  Journal- — 

1  "  Revision  of  Wolfs  Sun-Spot  Relative  Numbers,"  Monthly 
Weather  Review,  30,  171,  1902. 

a  Astrophysical  Journal,  10,  333,  1899. 

3  Wolf,  Astronomische  Nachrichten,  189,  261,  1911. 

Botanical  Gazette  numbers  its  footnotes  consecutively  through- 
out an  article;  all  the  other  journals  of  the  University  of  Chicago 
Press  number  their  footnotes  from  i  up  on  each  page,  except 
that  the  Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures  numbers 
them  consecutively  in  special  cases. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEXING  87 


INDEXING 

240.  In  indexes  of  proper  names  and  other  similar 
alphabetical  lists  the  following  rules  should  be 
observed: 

a)  Names  beginning  with  Mac,  Me,  or  M',  St., 
Ste.,  whether  the  following  letter  is  capitalized  or 
not,  should  be  listed  as  if  the  prefix  were  spelled 
Mac,  Saint,  Sainte,  thus  making  it  unnecessary 
for  one  who  consults  the  index  to  look  in  several 
places  to  make  sure  of  finding  the  name  sought: 

Machiavelli  St.  Louis 

Maclntyre,  Henry  Sainte  Beuve 

Mclntyre,  James  Salt  Lake  City 

M'Intyre,  Thomas 
Mack,  Joseph 

b)  Compound  names  should  be  listed  under  the 
first 'part  of  the  name.     List  the  other  parts  of 
the  names  in  their  respective  alphabetical  positions 
and  give  a  cross-reference  to  the  first: 

Campbell-Bannerman,  Sir  Henry 

Lloyd-George,  David 

Watts-Dimton,  Theodore 

George,  Lloyd-,  David.    See  Lloyd-George. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  the  case  of  hyphenated 
names  gratuitously  adopted,  as  in  the  case  of 
married  women  adding  the  maiden  name  to  the 
married  name,  the  name  preceding  the  hyphen 
may  be  disregarded,  and  listing  should  be  under 


88  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

the  letter  of  the  true  name,  with  a  cross-reference 
under  the  name  preceding  the  hyphen. 

c)  Names  with  prefixes  should  be  listed  under  the 
part  following  the  prefix,   except   (i)   in  English 
(see  b  above);    (ii)   in  French  when   the  prefix 
consists  of  or  contains  the  article;    (iii)  in  Italian 
and  Spanish  when  the  prefix  consists  simply  of  the 
article;  (iv)  in  Dutch,  the  "Van,"  "Ten,"  etc.,  being 
always  capitalized   (see  3,   note);    (v)   when  the 
prefix   and   the   name   are  written  as  one  word. 
Naturalized  names  with  prefixes  should  be  treated 
according  to  the  rules  for  the  language  adopted. 

Hoffman,  von;    Lima,  de;    Ponte  e  Horto,  da;    Santos 

Pereira  Jardin,  dos. 

English:  A  Becket;  De  Quincey;  De  Morgan;  D 'Israeli; 

MacDonald;  Van  Buren. 

French:  DuMoncel;  La  Rochefoucauld;  LeSage;  DuPin; 

Du  Bocage;  but:  Rosny,  de;  Bouille,  de;  Allard,  de. 

Italian  and  Spanish:   La  Lumia;   La  Farina;   Lo  Gatto; 

but:  Farina,  da;  Rio,  del;  Torre,  della. 

Prefix  compounded  with  the  name:  Vanderkinde,  Zurlauben, 

Dechambre,  Vanderhoeck,  Delacroix. 

In  the  case  of  the  exceptions  above  noted,  the 
first  letter  of  the  prefix  governs  the  alphabetical 
position  of  the  name. 

d)  Names  spelled  with  the  umlaut  a,  o,  ii  should 
be  listed  as  if  the  umlaut  were  spelled  out  ae,  oe,  ue: 

Muller,  A. 
Mufola,  C. 
Muller,  B. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEXING  89 

e)  Names  having  two  parts,  or  names  of  firms, 
connected  by  "and,"  "&,"  "y"  (Spanish),  or 
"et"  (French),  "und"  (German),  "e"  (Italian), 
should  be  listed  according  to  the  first  letter  of  the 
name  preceding  the  connective:  Smith  &  Evans 
(under  "S");  Gomez  y  Pineda  (under  "G"); 
Loubet  et  Meunier  (under  "L");  Duncker  und 
Humblot  (under  "D");  Sandrone  e  Vallardi 
(under  "S"). 
/)  On  the  subject  of  cross-references  see  62. 


90  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


TABULAR  WORK 

241.  In  n-pt.  and  lo-pt.  matter  open  (unruled)  tables 
should  ordinarily  be  set  in  g-pt.  leaded;   ruled,  in 
8-pt.  solid.     In  g-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  8-pt.  solid.    In  8-pt.  matter 
open  tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  leaded;  ruled,  in 
6-pt.  solid.     In  6-pt.  matter  both  open  and  ruled 
tables  should  be  set  in  6-pt.  solid.    There  is  a 
growing  practice  of  using  different  type  in  tables 
for  columns  representing  totals,  averages,  percent- 
ages, and  generalizations.    For  this  purpose  italic 
and  black-face  figures  may  be  resorted  to  with 
propriety,  to  set  off  the  various  classes  of  results. 

242.  Captions  for  the  columns  of  open  tables  and  box- 
heads  for  ruled  tables  should  ordinarily  be  set  in 
6-pt.    In  ruled  tables  with  box-heads  of  several 
stories,  the  upper  story — primary  heads — should  be 
set  in  caps  and  small  caps,  except  where  the  second 
story  consists  of  figures  only  (see  p.  92);  the  lower 
— secondary — in  caps  and  lower  case.    Wherever 
small  caps  are  used  in  box-heads,  the  "stub"  (i.e., 
first  column)  head  should,  as  a  rule,  also  be  set  in 
caps  and  small  caps. 

243.  In  ruled  tables  there  should  be  at  least  two  leads' 
space  between  the  horizontal  rules  and  the  matter 
inclosed,  and,  if  practicable,  at  least  the  equivalent 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TABULAR  WORK  QI 

of  an  en  quad,  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set,  between  the  perpendicular  rules  and 
the  matter  inclosed. 

244.  In  open  tables  either  periods,  one  em  apart  and 
aligned,  or  leaders,  may  be  used  between  the  col- 
umns (see  248).     In  ruled  tables,  in  the  "stub," 
leaders  should  usually  be  employed,  if  there  is  room. 
(A  leader  is  a  piece  of  type,  having  dots  ["period 
leader"]   or   short  lines   ["hyphen  leader"]   upon 
its  face,  used  in  tables,  indexes,  etc.,  to  lead  the  eye 
across  a  space  to  the  right  word  or  number.) 

245.  In  columns  of  figures,  to  express  a  blank  use  leaders 
across  the  full  width  of  the  column.     Center  the 
figures  in  the  column;  if  they  cannot  be  put  in  the 
exact  center,  and  there  is  an  unequal  number  of 
digits  in  the  groups,  leave  more  space  on  the  left 
than  on  the  right. 

246.  When  there  is  reading-matter  in  the  columns  of  a 
ruled  table,  it  should  be  centered,  if  possible;  if  any 
line  runs  over,  use  hanging  indention,  and  align  all 
on  the  left. 

247.  Double  rules  should  be  used  at  the  top  of  all  tables, 
but  perpendicularly,  as  a  usual  thing,  only  when  a 
table  is  doubled  up  on  itself. 

248.  Tables  of  two  columns  only  should  be  set  as  open; 
of  three  or  more,  as  ruled. 


92  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

249.  "Table  I,"  etc.,  in  headlines  of  tables  should  ordi- 
narily be  set  in  caps  of  the  type  in  which  the  body  of 
the  table  is  set;  the  following  (descriptive)  line,  if 
any,  in  caps  and  small  caps  of  the  same  type.  A 
single  (descriptive)  headline,  not  preceded  by  the 
number  of  the  table,  should  be  set  in  caps  of  the  type 
in  which  the  table  is  set. 


250.  Specimen  tables  for  illustration: 


TABLE  I 

SERIES  OF  HEADS  OF  BANDS  IN  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  BARIUM 
FLUORIDE 


Series 

A 

B 

c 

I   

2OIIZ    O 

—  O   4.3O2 

2  

2OIQ7    8 

—  O   4.4.1 

•Uo4 

7    06 

•3,  . 

1084.2    7 

—  o  4.^62 

jo     C22 

4  

IQ7II    7 

—  o  3^76^ 

l6    71  ^ 

e.  . 

19416.  2 

—  O    3Q32 

10  618 

6  

ICK3I.Q 

—  O   470 

7    IQ 

TABLE  II— Continued 


SERIES  C 

SERIES  C 

m 

Nobs. 

N  calc. 

m 

Nobs. 

^Vcalc. 

o  

I7OQ4.8 

1700?  o 

6 

I7I24.   6 

17  1  24.    7 

I  

100  6 

100  8 

7 

128  3 

128  4 

2  

106.4* 

1  06.  3 

8  .    ... 

131   7 

131   7 

112    2 

III    4. 

134.   6 

134    7 

4  

116.  «; 

Il6.  2 

10  

137  •  3 

*O*'  / 

137    4 

120  8 

I2O   6 

MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TABULAR  WORK 


93 


TABLE  SHOWING  DISTRIBUTION  OF  EMPLOYEES 


STATES 

No.  or 
FACTO- 
RIES 

NUMBER  OF  EMPLOYEES 

Men 

Women 

Boys 

Girls 

Total 

Illinois   

527 
117 

245 
203 

37° 

12,306 
4,075 
6,714 
5,923 
8,451 

809 
618 
338 
414 

5" 

"5 

79 
35 

23 

5 

13,253 
4,777 
7,087 

6,337 
8,994 

Wisconsin    

Minnesota  
Michigan  
Indiana    

26 

6 

Total   

1,462 

37»469 

2,690 

255 

34 

40,448 

Wedge 

o 

5 

10 

IS 

cm. 

cm. 

cm. 

cm. 

Settings  

I43-I 

145-5 

158.3 

187.1 

Diaph.  I  over  s3. 

142.4 

144-3 

160.9 

186.9 

Diaph.    0.29  cm.     over 

143-0 
142.2 

143-8 
144-9 
144.2 

159-6 
159-3 

184.8 
186.2 

wedge. 
Reading  of  pointer,  with 
meter-stick    touching 

142  .  68 

144-54 

159-5* 

186.25 

cm. 

DISTRICT 

MEMBERS  OF 
FAMILY  GROUPS 

LODGERS 

TOTAL 

Number 

Percentage 

Number 

Percentage 

Stockyards  .  .  . 
Jewish  
Bohemian  .... 
Polish  

6,348 
813 
1,183 
12,657 
2,249 

73 
79 
95 
96 

73 

2,383 

220 
56 

574 
835 

27 
21 
5 
4 

27 

8,73i 
1,033 

i,239 
13,231 
3,094 

Italian  

94  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

TABLE  V 
Date  Readings 

Oct.  31,  10.50  A.M 65.5 

Oct.  31,      2:15  P.M 65.5 

NOV.    I,     9:00  A.M 59.5 

Nov.   i,    3:00  P.M 57.8 

Nov.   i,    6:00  P.M 57.0 

NOV.     2,      9:00  A.M 53.0 

Nov.    2,  12:00  noon 53 -° 

Nov.  3,  10:00  A.M 47.3 

Nov.  3,  12:00  noon 46.5 

Nov.  3,    3:15  P.M 45-5 

Nov.  3,    6:15  P.M 44.5 

Nov.  4,    9:00  A.M 40.5 

Nov.  4,  12:00  noon 39.5 

.  Nov.  4,    3:00  P.M 38.5 


TECHNICAL   TERMS 


EXPLANATION  OF  TECHNICAL  TERMS 

THE  POINT  SYSTEM — 

251.  The  point  is  the  underlying  unit  of  all  typographical 
measures. 

252.  The  standard  of  measurement  is  the  pica.    A  pica 
is  twelve  points  (one-sixth  of  an  inch). 

This  line  is  set  in  i2-pt.  (pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  n-pt.  (small  pica). 
This  line  is  set  in  lo-pt.  (long  primer). 
This  line  is  set  in  g-pt.  (bourgeois}. 
This  line  is  set  in  8-pt.  (brevier'). 
This  line  is  set  in  7-pt.  (minion). 
This  line  is  set  in  6-pt.  (nonpareil). 
This  Hne  is  set  in  s-pt.  (pearl) . 

The  sizes  larger  or  smaller  than  these  are  seldom 
used  in  book  composition. 

STYLES  OF  TYPE — 

253.  Ordinary  type  is  called  roman.    To  "roman-quote" 
is  to  put  in  roman  type  between  quotation  marks. 

This  line  is  set  in  roman. 

254.  Type  with  a  sloping  face  is  called  italic  or  italics. 
Italic  is  indicated  in  manuscripts  by  a  straight  line 
under  the  word  or  words  (see  p.  123). 

This  line  is  set  in  italics. 

97 


98  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

255.  Type  with  a  heavy  black  face  is  called  bold  face. 
Bold  face  is  indicated  by  a  wavy  line  (see  p.  123). 
This  line  is  set  in  bold  face. 

256.  The  body  of  a  type  is  called  the  shank;  the  upper 
surface,  bearing  the  character,  the  face;    the  part 
of  the  face  projecting  beyond  the  shank,  the  kern; 
the  part  of  the  shank  projecting  beyond  the  face, 
the  shoulder. 

257.  A  font,  or  complete  assortment  of  a  given  size,  of 
type  includes  large  capitals  ("caps"),  small  capitals 
(''small  caps"),  and  lower-case  letters  (so  called  from 
being  placed  in  the  lower  half  of  the  printer's  case). 
Caps  are  indicated  by  three  straight  lines;    small 
caps,  by  two  (see  p.  123). 

THESE  ARE  CAPS  OF  p-PT.  ROMAN. 

THESE  ARE  SMALL  CAPS  OF  Q-PT.  ROMAN. 

These  are  lower  case  of  g-pt.  roman. 
SPACING — 

258.  The  technical  names  for  spaces  and  the  methods  of 
spacing  depend  on  whether  the  "foundry"  type  (i.e., 
type  set  by  hand)  or  machine-set  type  is  in  question. 
There  are  several  makes  of  type-setting  machines  on 
the  market,  but  of  these  the  monotype  (see  293)  and 
the  linotype  (see  294)  are  in  commonest  use. 

259.  The  monotype  and  linotype  machines  have  come 
into  such  universal  use  that  a  few  words  regarding 
their  respective  systems  of  spacing  are  proper: 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:    TECHNICAL  TERMS        99 
MONOTYPE 

In  monotype  composition  the  unit  system  instead 
of  the  pica  system  of  measurement  is  used.  There 
are  18  units  in  a  quad,  which,  unlike  the  em  quad 
of  the  foundry  type  for  hand  composition,  is  not  a 
perfect  square  at  the  end.  The  standard  space 
(see  261)  is  a  6-unit  space=3~em  space;  a  5-unit 
space =4-em  space;  a  4-unit  space  =  a  little  less 
than  a  5-em  space,  and  is  the  smallest  space  in  use 
on  the  monotype  machine.  These  are  cast  from 
matrices,  and  represent  "fixed"  spaces,  i.e.,  un- 
varying in  width.  On  the  other  hand,  in  the  pro- 
cess of  composition  on  the  keyboard,  the  swelling, 
or  justifying,  space  is  used  to  fill  out  a  line.  When 
it  is  evident  that  another  word  or  syllable  cannot 
be  set  in  a  line,  the  keys  indicating  the  proper  space 
are  struck  by  the  operator,  and  all  spaces  in  the 
line  are  spread  equally  to  fill  out  the  line,  resulting 
in  spaces  which  do  not  necessarily  contain  a  specific 
number  of  units  (see  293). 

LINOTYPE 

260.  On  the  linotype  machine  the  pica  system  of  meas- 
urement is  used.  There  are  three  " fixed"  spaces 
(see  261) :  the  em  quad,  the  en  quad,  and  the  thin 
space,  which  is  equal  to  a  4-em  space.  To  spread 
the  spaces,  a  space  band  is  used;  this  band  can 
spread  a  space  to  any  size  between  a  3-em  space 
and  a  space  a  trifle  larger  than  an  en  quad.  If  a 


100          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

space  smaller  than  a  thin  space  is  required,  it  must 
be  put  in  by  hand  (see  294). 

FOUNDRY  TYPE    (AND   GENERAL) 

261.  An  em,  em  quad,  or  simply  quad  (= quadrat)  is  a 
block  of  type  the  top  of  which  forms  a  perfect 
square.  A  i2-pt.  quad  is  thus  a  piece  of  metal 
one-sixth  of  an  inch  square  at  the  ends.  The  term 
em  is  also  used  of  the  size  of  such  a  square  in  any 
given  size  of  type  as  a  unit  of  measurement. 
"Indent  8-pt.  2  ems"  thus  means  that  the  line  should 
be  indented  16  points.  An  em  dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  em. 

Two-  and  three-em  quads  are  multiples  of  the  above, 
cast  in  one  block  of  type-metal.  Two-  and  three-em 
dashes  are  dashes  the  width  of  2-  and  3-em  quads 
respectively. 

An  en  quad  is  half  the  size  of  an  em  quad  in  width. 
Thus  an  8-pt.  en  quad  is  4  points  wide  (thick)  and 
8  points  long  (deep).  An  en  dash  is  a  dash  the 
width  of  an  en  quad. 

A  three-em  space  is  one-third  of  an  em  in  thickness. 
This  is  also  called  a  thick  space,  and  is  the  standard 
space  used  to  separate  words. 
A  four-em  space  is  one-fourth  of  an  em;   a  five-em 
space  is  one-fifth  of  an  em.     Four-  and  5 -em  spaces 
are  also  called  middle  and  thin  spaces. 
A  hair-space  is  any  space  thinner  than  a  5-em. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       IOI 

This    line    is    spaced    with    em    quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  en  quads. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  3-em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  4-em  spaces. 

This  line  is  spaced  with  5 -em  spaces. 

The  letters  in  this  word  are  hair-spaced:  America. 

This  is  a  3-em  dash:  

This  is  a  2 -em  dash:  

This  is  an  em  dash:  — 
This  is  an  en  dash:  - 

262.  Space  evenly.    A  standard  line  should  have  a  3-em 
space  between  all  words  not  separated  by  other 
punctuation  points  than  commas,  and  after  commas; 
an  en  quad  after  semicolons,  and  colons  followed  by 
a  lower-case  letter;    two  3-em  spaces  after  colons 
followed  by  a  capital;    an  em  quad  after  periods, 
and  exclamation  and  interrogation  points,  conclud- 
ing a  sentence. 

263.  If  necessary  to  reduce  spacing  in  a  line,  begin  with 
commas,  and  letters  of   slanting  form — i.e.,  with  a 
large  "shoulder"  on  the  side  adjoining  the  space;  if 
necessary  to  increase,  begin  with  overlapping  let- 
ters— i.e.,  with   "  kerns "    protruding  on  the  side 
adjoining  the  space — straight-up-and-down  letters, 
and  points  other  than  periods  and  commas  (in  this 
order). 

264.  In  a  well-spaced  line,  with  a  3-em  space  between 
a  majority  of  the  words,  there  should  not  be  more 
than  an  en  quad  between  the  rest;  this  proportion 


102         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

should  be  maintained  in  increasing  or  reducing.  To 
justify  a  line  is  to  adjust  it,  making  it  even  or  true, 
by  proper  spacing. 

265.  Do  not  follow  an  exceptionally  thin-spaced  line  with 
an  exceptionally  wide-spaced  one,  or  vice  versa,  if 
at  all  avoidable. 

266.  Never  hair-space,  or  em-quad,  a  line  to  avoid  a 
run-over. 

267.  Do  not  space  out  the  last  line  of  a  paragraph  allowing 
of  an  indention  of  an  em  or  more  at  the  end. 

268.  Short  words,  like  "a,"  "an,"  etc.,  should  have  the 
same  space  on  each  side. 

269.  Use  a  thin  space  after  §,  If,  and  similar  signs;  before 
"£.,"  "ff.,"  and  the  metric  symbols: 

"§  14.     Be  it  further  ordained  .  .  .  .";    pp.  ioff.;  i6cm. 

270.  In  American  and  English  sums  of  money  no  space 
is  used  between  the  symbols,  $,  and  £  (pounds), 
s.  (shillings) ,  and  d.  (pence) ,  and  the  numerals  (an 
en  leader  is  used  for  a  decimal  point) : 

$2.75;  £1035.  2d;  10°  C. 

271.  After  Arabic  and  Roman  numerals  at  the  beginning 
of  lines,  denoting  subsections,  there  should  be  an 
en  quad.    After  Arabic  and  Roman  numerals  at 
the  beginning  of  center-heads  there  should  be  an 
em  quad.     Small-cap  headings  should  have  an  en 
quad  between  the  words;  cap-and-small-cap  and 
cap  headings,  two  3-em  spaces. 


." 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       103 

272.  Scripture  references  should  be  spaced  thus: 
II  Cor.  1:16-20;  2:5  —  3:12. 

273.  Between    letters    forming     products,    and    before 
superior  figures  or  letters  indicating  powers,  and 
inferior  figures  or  letters,  ordinarily  no  space  should 
be  used: 


INDENTATION  (PRINTER'S  TERM:   INDENTION)  — 

274.  In  measures  of  less  than  10  picas'  width,  indent  all 
sizes  i  em.    In  measures  of  from  10  to  20,  indent 
n-pt,  i  em;  io-pt.,  i£;  Q-pt.,  ij;  8-pt.,  i£;  6-pt.,  2. 
In  measures  of  from  20  to  30,  indent  n-pt.,  ij  ems; 
io-pt,  ij;   9-pt.,  if;   8-pt.,  2;    6-pt.,  2j.    This  is 
for  plain  paragraphs.    In  hanging  indentions,   in 
measures  of  less  than   10  picas,   indent  all  sizes 
i  em;  from  10  to  20,  n-pt.,  io-pt.,  9-pt.,  and  8-pt., 
1  1  ems;  6-pt.,  2  ems;  from  20  to  30,  n-pt.,  io-pt., 
9-pt.,  and  8-pt.,  2  ems;  6-pt.,  3  ems. 

275.  In  poetry,  center  the  longest  line  and  let  the  inden- 
tion be  governed  by  that;    unless  the  longest  line 
is  of  disproportionate  length,    in  which  case  an 
average  of  the  long  lines  should  be  struck,  the  idea 
being  to  give  the  whole  a  centered  appearance. 
Where  quotations  from  different  poems,  following 
each  other  in  close  succession,  vary  but  slightly  in 
length  of  verse  lines,  it  is  better  to  indent  all  alike. 
Indent  according  to  rhymes  and  length  of  lines.    In 


104         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

blank  verse,  where  the  lines  are  approximately  of 
the  same  length,  they  should  be  aligned.  If  con- 
secutive lines  rhyme,  they  should  likewise,  as  a  rule, 
be  aligned.  If  the  rhymes  alternate,  or  follow  at 
certain  intervals,  indent  the  rhyming  lines  alike;  that 
is,  if,  e.g.,  lines  i  and  3,  and  2  and  4,  rhyme,  set  the 
former  flush  in  the  measure  previously  determined  by 
the  longest  line,  and  indent  the  latter  (usually  one 
em) ;  follow  this  scheme  in  any  similar  arrangement. 
If  any  line  is  disproportionately  short — that  is,  con- 
tains a  smaller  number  of  feet — indent  it  more: 

And  blessed  are  the  horny  hands  of  toil ! 
The  busy  world  shoves  angrily  aside 
The  man  who  stands  with  arms  akimbo  set, 
Until  occasion  tells  him  what  to  do. 

I  laugh  at  the  lore  and  the  pride  of  man, 
At  the  sophist  schools  and  the  learned  clan; 
For  what  are  they  all,  in  their  high  conceit, 
When  man  in  the  bush  with  God  may  meet  ? 

So  nigh  is  grandeur  to  our  dust, 

So  near  is  God  to  man, 
When  Duty  whispers  low,  "Thou  must," 

The  youth  replies,  "I  can." 

Not  lightly  fall 

Beyond  recall 
The  written  scrolls  a  breath  can  float; 

The  crowning  fact, 

The  kingliest  act 
Of  Freedom  is  the  freeman's  vote! 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       105 

276.  In    ordinary    reading-matter    "plain    paragraphs" 
are  always  preferable.    Where  it  is  desired  to  bring 
into  relief  the  opening  word  or  words  of  a  paragraph, 
or  the  number  introducing  such  paragraph,  or  where 
a  center-head  makes  more  than  three  lines,  "hanging 
indention"  is  often  employed  (see  284). 

LEADS — 

277.  A  lead  is  a  strip  of  metal  used  to  separate  lines  of 
type.    The  ordinary   (standard)   lead  is  2   points 
thick.    Matter   with   leads   between   the   lines   is 
called  leaded;  without,  solid. 

This  book,  for  the  most  part,  is  set  leaded.  This  paragraph, 
for  illustration,  and  the  Index  are  set  solid.  Nearly  all  books 
are  leaded. 

278.  A  slug  is  a  strip  of  metal,  thicker  than  a  lead,  used 
in  the  make-up  of  printed  matter  into  pages,  to  be 
inserted  after  headlines,   etc.    The  two  standard 
sizes  are  6  and  12  points  (a  nonpareil  and  a  pica) 
thick,  respectively. 

HEADS  OR  HEADINGS — 

279.  A  center-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  equal  distances 
from  both  margins  of  the  page  or  column.     Center- 
heads  are  usually  set  in  caps  or  in  small  caps.    This 
is  a  center-head: 

SEC.  VII.     THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  SOCIOLOGY 

When  such  center-head  makes  more  than  one  line, 
either  the  (inverted)  "pyramid"  form  (for  two  or 


io6         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

three  lines)  or  "hanging  indention"  (for  more  than 
three  lines)  is  employed: 

ART  EDUCATION  FOR  THE  AMERICAN  PEOPLE,   AS   SHOWN  AT 

THE     LOUISIANA     PURCHASE     EXPOSITION,    IN    THE 

NORMAL  SCHOOLS,  AND  IN  ART  SCHOOLS 

ON  CERTAIN  IMPLICATIONS  OF  POSSIBLE  CHANGES  IN  THE 
FORM  AND  DIMENSIONS  OF  THE  SUN,  AND  SOME  SUGGES- 
TIONS TOWARD  EXPLAINING  CERTAIN  PHENOMENA  OP 
VARIABLE  STARS 

280.  A  side-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  side  of  the 
page  or  column.    It  may  either  be  set  in  a  separate 
line,  in  which  case  it  is  usually  set  flush — that  is,  in 
alignment  with  the  margin  of  the  type-page;    or 
run  in — that  is,  run  together  in  a  continuous  line 
with  the  paragraph  to  which  it  belongs.    The  latter 
is  the  more  common  form.    Side-heads  are  most 
frequently  set  in  italics,  only  the  first  word  and 
proper  names  being  capitalized;  sometimes  in  caps 
and  small  caps  or  in  bold  face  (see  172): 

Side-head — 

A  side-head  is  a  headline  .... 
Side-head. — A  side-head  is  .... 
SIDE-HEAD.— A  side-head  is  .... 

Side-head— 

A  side-head  is  .... 

281.  A  cut-in  head  is  a  head  placed  in  a  box  cut  into 
the  side  of  the  type-page,  usually  set  in  different 
type,  and  as  a  rule  placed  under  the  first  two  lines 
of  the  paragraph; 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       107 

In  making  inquiry,  therefore,  into  the  value  of  fraternity 

life  among  the  children,  it  is  necessary  to  test  it  entirely  in 

accordance  with  its  power  to  contribute  to  the 

TfflUp  welfare  of  the  school  as  a  social  whole.    The 

Influence  .  ... 

school,  being  a  social  organization,  has  a  right 

to  demand  that  every  individual  contribute  the  best  that  is 
in  him  to  the  good  of  all.    In  making  this  contribution,  it 

282.  A  box-head  is  a  head  for  a  column  in  a  ruled  table 
(see  250). 

283.  A  running-head  is  a  headline  placed  at  the  top  of 
each  page  of  a  book,  etc.,  usually  giving  the  main 
title  of  the  work  on  the  left-hand  (verso)  page,  and 
the  title  of  the  chapter,  or  other  subdivision,  on 
the  right-hand  (recto)  page.    A  good  working  rule 
for  running-heads  is  to  set  them  in  roman  or  italic 
capitals  two  sizes  (points)   smaller  than  the  type 
of  the  text. 

PARAGRAPHS — 

284.  Two  kinds  of  paragraphs  are  distinguished — plain 
and  hanging.    A  plain  (or  regular)  paragraph  has 
the  first  line  indented,  and  the  others  set  flush.    A 
hanging  paragraph  ("hanging  indention")  has  the 
first  line  set  flush,  and  the  others  indented: 

* 

Human  Nature  and  the  Social  Order.    By  CHARLES  HORTON 

COOLEY.     New  York:    Scribner,  1902.     Pp.  viii+4O4. 

In  terms  of  his  own  thesis  Dr.  Cooley  has  transformed 

the  social  materials  of  his  times  into  a  personal  product; 

his  mind  has  reorganized  and  reproduced  the  suggested,  etc. 


io8         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PROOFS— 

285.  A  galley -proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  contained 
in  a  long,  shallow  receptacle  of  metal,  known  as  a 
galley,  into  which  the  compositor,  the  operator,  or 
the  casting-machine  places  the  material  as  it  is  set, 
line  by  line. 

286.  A  page-proof  is  an  impression  of  the  type  material 
made  up  into  page-form. 

287.  A  plate-proof  or  foundry-proof  is  a  proof  taken  of  the 
type-page  immediately  before  an  electrotype  cast  is 
made  of  it.     This  proof  has  a  black  border  around 
the  pages,  made  by  ink  from  the  metal  frame  used 
to  hold  the  type  in  place  while  the  cast  is  being 
made.    Most  publications  nowadays   are   printed 
from  such  plates,  and  not  directly  from  the  type. 

288.  A  foul  proof  is  a  galley-proof  containing  author's 
corrections. 

289.  A  revise  is  a  new  proof  of  type  corrected  from  a 
marked  proof. 

MAKE-UP — 

290.  The  arranging  into  page-form  of  type-lines  is  called 
the  make-up. 

291.  A  folio  is  a  page-number.     Even  numbers  are  placed 
on  the  verso;   odd,  on  the  recto.     A  drop- folio  is  a 
page-number  placed  at  the  bottom  of  a  page. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  TECHNICAL  TERMS       109 

292.  A  half-title  or  bastard  title  is  the  abbreviated  title  of 
a  book  placed  on  a  separate  page  preceding  the  full 
title-page,  or  the  title  of  a  part,  chapter,  etc.,  preced- 
ing such  part  or  chapter  on  a  separate  page  in  the 
body  of  the  book. 

TYPESETTING  MACHINES— 

293.  The  monotype — named  Lanston  after  the  patentee — 
is  a  composing-machine  on  which,  by  touching  a  key- 
board, perforations  are  made  in  strips  of  paper,  which 
then  are  transferred  to  a  second  machine,  where  the 
matrices  to  which  the  perforations  correspond  are 
brought   in   contact   with   molten   type-metal,    the 
characters  being  cast  separately  and  arranged  auto- 
matically on  a  galley  in  justified  lines  (see  259). 

294.  The   linotype — named    Mergenthaler   after   its   in- 
ventor— is    a    composing-machine    on    which,    by 
touching  a  keyboard,  the  matrices  from  which  the 
characters  are  cast  arrange  themselves  automati- 
cally in  lines  in  a  receptacle,  which  then  is  brought 
in  contact,  on  the  same  machine,  with  molten  type- 
metal,  through  a  mechanical  device  which  liberates 
and  arranges  in  order  on  a  galley  the  stereotyped 
strips,  called  "slugs,"  each  consisting  of  a  line  of 
type  (see  260). 


APPENDIX 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS 
PREPARATION  OF  MANUSCRIPTS— 

Manuscripts  should  be  either  typewritten  or  in  a 
perfectly  clear  handwriting.  The  former  is  preferable. 

The  sheets  should  be  of  uniform  size;  9"Xn"  is  a 
desirable  size. 

Only  one  side  of  the  paper  should  be  used. 

Never  roll  manuscripts;  place  them  flat  in  a  box  or 
an  envelope. 

The  sheets  should  not  be  fastened  together  except  by 
pins  or  clips,  which  can  easily  be  removed. 

When  one  piece  of  a  page  is  to  be  fastened  to  another, 
use  mucilage,  not  pins.  Pins  often  become  unfastened 
and  the  slips  lost  or  misplaced. 

Liberal  margins  should  be  left  at  the  top  and  left- 
hand  side  of  the  sheets.  This  space  will  be  needed  by 
the  reader  or  printer  for  directions. 

The  pages  should  be  numbered  consecutively. 
Inserted  and  omitted  pages  should  be  clearly  indicated. 
Thus,  sheets  to  be  inserted  after  p.  4  should  be  marked 
"4A,"  "46,"  etc.;  sheets  omitted  between  p.  4  and  p.  8 
should  be  indicated  by  numbering  p.  4,  "4-7." 

Additions  to  original  pages  should  be  placed  after  the 
sheets  to  which  they  belong,  and  should  be  marked 
"Insert  A,"  "Insert  B,"  etc.  The  places  where  they  are 

113 


H4         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

to  be  inserted  should  be  indicated  by  writing,  "Here 
insert  A,"  etc.,  on  the  margin  of  the  original  pages. 

PARAGRAPHS — 

Paragraphs  should  be  plainly  indicated,  either  by 
indenting  the  first  line  or  by  a  ^f  mark. 

FOOTNOTES — 

Footnotes  should  be  clearly  designated,  either  by 
separating  them  from  the  text  by  running  a  line  across 
the  page,  or  by  using  ink  of  different  color.  Some  writers 
make  a  perpendicular  fold  in  the  paper,  using  two- 
thirds  of  the  space  for  the  text  and  one- third  for  the 
notes. 

The  word  in  the  text  carrying  the  note  should  be  followed 
by  a  superior  figure  corresponding  to  that  preceding  the 
note. 

Footnotes  should  never  be  run  into  the  text  in  manu- 
scripts, whether  in  parentheses  or  otherwise. 

NOTE. — It  is  important  to  remember  that  in  matter  set  on  the 
linotype  machine  the  slightest  change  necessitates  the  resetting  of  the 
whole  line.  Since  it  is  impossible  to  foresee  how  the  notes  will  happen 
to  come  out  in  the  make-up,  it  is  impracticable  to  number  them  from  i 
up  on  each  page.  The  best  way  is  to  number  them  consecutively  through- 
out an  article  or  by  chapters  in  a  book;  bearing  in  mind,  however,  the 
very  essential  point  that  the  change,  by  omission  or  addition,  of  one  single 
number  involves  the  resetting  of  the  whole  first  line  of  each  succeeding  note 
to  the  end  of  the  series,  as  well  as  the  line  in  the  text  bearing  the  reference 
to  the  note. 

This  difficulty  is  not  met  with  in  matter  set  on  the  monotype  machine 
or  by  hand,  where  the  change  of  a  number  amounts  simply  to  substituting 
one  figure  for  another. 


HINTS  TO  AUTHORS  AND  EDITORS  115 

PROPER  NAMES,  ETC. — 

Proper  names,  foreign  words,  and  figures  should,  in 
handwritten  manuscript,  be  written  with  the  utmost  care 
and  distinctness. 

TITLE-PAGES,  ETC. — 

Copy  for  title-pages,  prefaces,  tables  of  contents,  etc., 
should  be  submitted  with  the  manuscript.  Copy  for 
indexes  should  be  compiled  from  the  special  set  of  page- 
proofs  furnished  for  this  purpose,  and  promptly  delivered 
to  the  printers.  Unnecessary  delay  is  often  caused  by 
postponing  these  details  till  the  last  minute. 

READING  OF  PROOFS — 

Read  and  return  your  proofs  promptly. 

In  marking  proof-sheets,  use  the  standard  proofreaders' 
marks  (see  p.  1 23) .  Do  not  adopt  a  system  of  your  own, 
which,  however  plain  it  may  seem  to  you,  might  appear 
less  so  to  the  compositor. 

Be  careful  to  answer  all  queries  in  the  proofs.  Delays 
and  errors  often  result  from  not  attending  to  them. 

Remember  that  changes  in  the  type  cost  money.  The 
omission  or  addition  of  a  word  in  the  middle  of  a  para- 
graph may  necessitate  resetting  the  whole  of  this  from 
that  point  on;  and  if  such  alteration  is  made  in  the  page- 
proof,  it  may  further  involve  repaging  the  entire  article 
or  chapter.  Make  your  manuscript  as  perfect  as  possible 
before  delivering  it  to  the  printer.  Any  necessary  altera- 
tions should  be  made  in  the  galley-proof,  as  each  succeed- 


Ii6         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

ing  stage  will  add  to  the  cost.  Corrections  in  plates  should 
be  studiously  avoided.  Not  only  are  they  expensive,  but 
they  are  likely  to  injure  the  plates. 

The  original  manuscript  should  in  each  instance  be 
returned  with  the  galley-proof,  in  order  that  the  proof- 
reader may  refer  to  it,  should  any  question  arise;  and 
each  successive  set  of  proofs  returned  should  be  accom- 
panied by  the  previous  marked  set.  This  will  assist  in 
calculating  the  cost  of  alterations  properly  chargeable 
to  you. 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  117 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS 

Read  everything  as  if  you  yourself  were  the  author. 

Be  particularly  careful  about  proper  names  and  figures. 
If  the  copy  is  not  perfectly  clear,  or  if  you  have  reason  to 
doubt  its  correctness,  look  it  up,  or  query  it  to  the  author. 

In  asking  questions  of  authors  or  editors,  make  your 
point  clear.  A  simple  query  is  often  not  enough  to  draw 
attention  to  the  particular  point  you  have  in  mind. 
Queries  in  the  manuscript  should  be  transferred  to  the 
proof,  or  attention  should  be  directed  in  the  proof  to  the 
queries  made  by  the  copy-reader  in  the  manuscript. 

Be  discreet  about  your  queries.  Do  not  stultify  your- 
self and  discredit  the  office  by  asking  foolish  questions 
on  the  proof.  The  author  will  be  thankful  for  any  sensible 
suggestion  you  may  make,  but  will  resent  trivial  criticisms. 

Make  a  study  of  the  "personal  equation"  in  the  case 
of  those  individuals  (editors  and  others)  with  whom  you 
as  a  proofreader  will  constantly  have  to  deal.  One  person 
may  expect  of  you  as  a  matter  of  course  what  another 
might  regard  as  an  unwarranted  interference. 

Never  hesitate  to  correct  anything  that  is  palpably 
wrong,  however  positively  the  copy  may  assert  the  con- 
trary. Remember  that  the  blame  for  the  error  will 
eventually  be  laid  at  your  door,  and  justly  so. 

Do  not  follow  copy  blindly,  unreasoningly.  Follow 
copy  only  when,  and  as  far  as,  it  is  correct.  Whether  or 


n8         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

not  it  is  correct,  you  are  the  judge.  Such  an  excuse  as, 
"I  thought  the  copy  was  edited";  or,  "I  thought  the 
author  knew  what  he  wanted,"  is  no  excuse  at  all. 

Do  not  ask  authors  or  editors  to  decide  questions  of 
style.  The  Manual  of  Style  is  primarily  meant  for  you. 
Learn  its  rules  so  that  you  may  correct  any  violation  of 
them  you  may  come  upon,  without  asking  questions. 

Do  not  fall  into  the  fallacy  that  the  author's  or  editor's 
O.K.  relieves  you  of  all  or  any  part  of  your  responsibility. 
Authors  and  editors  depend  on  the  proofreader  to  see  to 
it  that  the  typographical  requirements  have  been  met, 
and  that  the  adopted  style  has  been  adhered  to,  and 
affix  their  signatures  only  on  that  supposition. 

Do  not  shield  yourself  behind  your  copyholder.  The 
copyholder  is  there  to  assist  you,  not  to  tell  you  how  to 
do  things.  If  you  think  you  have  cause  to  doubt  her 
version  of  a  matter,  investigate  for  yourself. 

Do  not  suggest  to  the  copyholder  the  reading  of  a  word 
or  phrase  which  she  has  difficulty  in  making  out  from  the 
manuscript.  If  she  cannot  decipher  the  manuscript, 
remember  that  you  are  the  arbiter,  and  not  the  compositor. 

Do  not  permit  yourself  to  be  stampeded.  Cultivate 
speed,  but  remember  that  accuracy  is  even  more  impor- 
tant. If  the  necessary  time  is  not  given  you,  take  it — 
within  reasonable  limits — in  order  to  do  things  right. 
The  credit  accruing  to  you  from  doing  things  absolutely 
right  is  likely  to  outlast  the  displeasure  at  your  lack  of 
dispatch. 

In  unavoidable  cases  of  "rush,"  where  conditions  and 


HINTS  TO  PROOFREADERS  IIQ 

orders  are  imperative,  protect  yourself  by  letting  it  be 
understood  that  you  have  done  your  best  in  the  time  allot- 
ted you,  but  that  you  must  disclaim  any  further  responsi- 
bility.. 

Put  your  initial  at  the  top  of  every  galley  you  read 
or  revise.  This  will  save  time  in  tracing  proofs,  and  insure 
the  giving  of  credit  where  it  belongs. 


120         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS 

Cultivate  a  low,  soft,  clear  reading-voice.  Only  your 
own  proofreader  has  to  hear  you. 

Remember  that,  from  the  proofreader's  point  of  view, 
the  small  words  are  as  essential  as  the  big  ones.  Get 
them  all  in — and  get  them  in  right. 

Enunciate  your  plural  s's  distinctly. 

Do  not  get  offended  when  your  reader  asks  you  to 
repeat,  or  to  look  at  the  copy  for  himself. 

Regulate  and  equalize  your  speed.  Do  not  race  at  a 
break-neck  pace  through  typewritten  copy,  while  you 
thread  your  path  fumblingly  through  the  mazes  of  manu- 
script. 

Do  not  keep  guessing  at  a  word.  Look  at  it  closely, 
consider  the  context,  and  do  not  speak  it  until  you  have 
made  it  out — or  at  least  made  the  very  best  guess  of  which 
you  are  capable. 

Sit  at  right  angles  to  your  reader,  if  possible.  He 
hears  you  better,  and  you  can  watch  his  hand  better,  if 
you  do. 

Give  your  reader  a  chance  to  make  his  corrections. 
Slow  up  the  moment  he  puts  his  pencil  to  the  paper. 
This  will  save  you  going  over  the  same  ground  twice. 

Evolve  your  own  system  of  signals.  Do  not,  for 
instance,  waste  time  by  saying  "in  italics"  for  every  word 
or  letter  so  treated.  Instead,  raise  your  voice,  or  tap 


HINTS  TO  COPYHOLDERS  121 

the  table  with  your  pencil  once  for  each  word,  or  both. 
Such  a  code  need  not  be  intelligible  to  others  than  your- 
self and  your  reader. 

Do  not  waste  time  over  matters  of  style.  The  proof- 
reader is  supposed  to  know  the  rules  without  your  telling 
him;  for  instance,  what  titles  are  to  be  set  in  italics,  and 
what  roman-quoted. 

Be  careful  in  transferring  marks.  A  mark  in  the  wrong 
place  means  two  errors  uncorrected  in  place  of  one  cor- 
rected. 

In  sending  out  proofs,  see  that  everything  is  there. 
Arrange  the  copy  and  proof-sheets  neatly  and  consecu- 
tively. 

Never  send  out  proofs  without  consulting  the  job  ticket 
for  the  number  wanted,  and  the  name  and  address  of  the 
person  to  whom  they  are  to  be  sent. 

The  manuscript  should  accompany  the  galley-proof; 
the  foul  proof  (author's  marked  galley-proof)  should 
accompany  the  page-proof.  In  case  no  galley-proof  has 
been  sent,  the  manuscript  should  accompany  the  page- 
proof. 

Indicate  in  the  lower  left-hand  corner  the  contents  of 
all  the  envelopes  you  address. 

Fasten  your  pins  in  the  center  at  the  top,  not  diago- 
nally in  the  left-hand  corner,  thus  covering  up  the  direc- 
tions, etc.,  often  written  there. 

Return  every  evening  to  the  file  or  the  bookcase  any 
volume  that  may  have  been  taken  out  for  reference  during 
the  day. 


122          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

Remember  that  you  are  the  housekeeper  of  the  proof- 
room, and  take  pride  in  its  neat  and  orderly  appearance. 
Keeping  the  records,  files,  etc.,  naturally  devolves  upon 
you.  Perfect  your  system  so  that  everything  can  be 
located  at  a  moment's  notice.  The  more  of  that  kind  of 
work  you  do  without  being  asked,  and  the  better  you  do 
it,  the  more  you  will  be  appreciated. 


PROOFREADER'S  MARKS 

5>  Dele,  or  delete:  take#  out. 

9  Letter  reversed  —  turn. 

#  Put  ii^pace. 

O  Clo^e  up  —  no  space. 

VA  Bad^spacing^space^nore.evenly. 

**>f  Wro^g  font:  character  of  wrong  size  or 

style. 
*>v  Transp@e. 

^ake  a  new  paragraph. 

D          ^ndent;  or,  put  in  an  em-quad  space. 

C  C  Carry  to  the  left. 

3  Cjrry  to  the  right. 
n  'Elevate. 


X  Imperfect  type—  correct. 

vb  Space  showsjbetween  words  —  push  down. 

^          ^tr^ighte11  crooked  line. 
II  iz:          HStraighten  aliggjnent. 

Restore  orjetain  words  crossed  out. 
Print  (£e^,  fi,  etc.)  as  a  ligature. 
Words  are  omitted  from,  or  in,xopy. 
Query  to  author:  Is  this  correct? 
Put  in.caDitatQ. 

**>  Put  in  SMALL  CAPITALS. 

•^c/  Put  in  LOWER  CACE. 

Kflrm'  Put  in  *em&n  type. 

**&  Put  in  iteUe  type. 

-W  Put  in  bold  face  type. 

0  -K/VWWUW/*     Jr 


123 


INDEXES 


INDEX  TO  MANUAL 

[The  numbers,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  refer  to  sections] 


"A"  and  "an":  use  of,  before  h  and  «, 
114;  spacing  of,  268. 

"a-"  (negative  particle),  compounds  with, 
205. 

Abbreviations:  in  literary  references,  no, 
237  (cf.  37);  no  space  between  elements 
of,  52,  103;  not  to  be  divided,  219; 
of  academic  titles,  22;  of  biblical  and 
apocryphal  books,  list  of,  109;  of  names 
of  states,  106;  of  titles  of  publications, 
omission  of  period  after  initials  used  for, 
123;  rules  for,  106-11;  use  of  apos- 
trophe in,  123;  of  period  after,  123. 

"-able"  and  "-ible,"  in  divisions,  224. 

Academic  degrees,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization Of,  21-22. 

Accents,  retention  of,  in  foreign  words 
incorporated  into  English,  59. 

Acquired,  limited,  or  special  meaning, 
words  having,  capitalization  of,  25. 

Acts,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
18. 

A.D.  (anno  Domini):  spacing  of,  52,  219; 
use  of  small  caps  for,  52. 

Address,  capitalization  of  titles  in  direct, 
21. 

Address  line:  at  end  of  letters,  etc.,  how  to 
set,  50;  at  opening  of  letters,  etc.,  how 
to  set,  64;  omission  of  comma  after,  161. 

Addresses,  titles  of :  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Adjectives:  capitalization  of,  in  titles 
of  publications,  41;  compound,  183; 
capitalization  of,  derived  from  proper 
nouns,  i;  ending  in  "-ical,"  how  to 
divide,  229;  omission  of  comma  between 
two,  147;  proper,  capitalization  of,  i 
(cf.  5,  S3)- 

Administrative  bodies,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  12. 

Adverbial  clauses,  150. 

Adverbs:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41;  ending  in  "-ly,"  not 
to  be  hyphenated  with  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples, 183;  use  of  comma  in  connec- 
tion with,  145. 


te,  rules  for  use  of,  115. 

Ages:  historical,  linguistic,  and  geological, 

capitalization  of,  14;  to  be  spelled  out, 

99. 

Algebraic  formulae:  letters  used  to  desig- 
nate unknown  quantities  in,  67;  spacing 

of,  273. 
Alignment,     quotation     marks     to     be 

"cleared"  in,  90. 
Alliances,  political,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  16. 

Alphabetizing  of  names,  rules  for,  240. 
A.M.  (ante  meridiem);  52,219;  use  of  small 

caps  for,  52. 

American  system  of  divisions,  221. 
"Ampersand":  definition  of,  107;   when 

used,  107. 
And:   "short,"  107;  when  to  use  comma 

before,  143. 
Anglicized   derivatives   from    Latin   and 

Greek,  form  of  diphthongs  at  and  ct  in, 

us. 

"Angstrom  units,"  abbreviation  for,  23, 
in. 

"Ante,"  compounds  with,  208. 

"Anti,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Antithetical  clauses,  149. 

Apocrypha:  list  of  abbreviations  for,  109; 
titles  of,  to  be  set  in  roman,  60. 

Apostles,  omission  of  "St."  in  connection 
with  names  of,  108. 

Apostrophe:  rules  for  use  of,  163-65;  use 
of,  in  abbreviations,  123;  to  form 
plural  of  numerals,  165;  to  form  pos- 
sessive, 164  (cf.  113);  to  mark  omis- 
sion of  figures  or  letters,  163  (cf.  123). 

Appositional  clauses,   150. 

Arabic  numerals,  spacing  of,  at  beginning  of 
lines,  271;  in  headlines,  spacing  of,  271. 

Art,  titles  of  works  of,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  84. 

Article:  definite,  not  to  be  used  in  connec- 
tion with  "Rev."  and  "Hon.,"  92; 
not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of  peri- 
odicals, 41 ;  indefinite,  form  of,  before  eu, 
sounded  h,  "one  "  etc  and  long  «,  114. 


127 


128        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Articles,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Artificial  noun-formations,  plural  of,  165. 

Artistic  schools,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9. 

"As  follows,"  use  of  colon  in  connection 
with,  132. 

Asterisk,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  232. 

Astronomical  terms:  capitalization  of, 
48;  use  of  italics  for,  71. 

Astrophysical  Journal:  connecting  num- 
bers in,  173,  note;  metric  symbols  in, 
123,  note;  style  for  footnotes  in,  239, 
note;  use  of  comma  with  figures  in, 
159,  note. 

Authors:  hints  to,  pp.  113-16;  names  of, 
if  in  text,  not  repeated  in  footnotes,  235. 

Averages  and  generalizations,  columns 
of,  in  tables,  sometimes  in  distinctive 
type,  241. 

Bastard  title.    See  Half-title. 

B.C.  ("before  Christ"):  spacing  of,  52, 
219;  use  of  small  caps  for,  52;  hundreds 
to  be  repeated  with,  173. 

"Bi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Bible:  books  of,  abbreviations  for,  109; 
capitalization  of  names  for,  29;  titles 
of  books  of,  to  be  capitalized,  31;  to  be 
set  in  roman,  60;  versions  of,  abbrevia- 
tions for,  109;  capitalized,  30. 

Biblical:  books,  abbreviations  for,  109, 
and  capitalization  of  names  of,  31; 
parables,  capitalization  of,  32;  terms, 
miscellaneous,  capitalization  of,  33. 

Bills,  legisktive,  capitalization  of,  18. 

Biological  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,  46. 

Black  face.    See  Bold-face  type. 

Blank  verse,  indention  of,  275. 

Blanks,  use  of  leaders  for,  in  columns  of 
figures,  245. 

Blocks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

Bodies:  legislative,  judiciary,  and  admin- 
istrative, capitalization  of  names  of,  12; 
military,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled 
out,  100. 

Bold-face  type:  defined,  255;  how  indi- 
cated, 255. 

"Book,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Books:  biblical,  abbreviation  of,  109,  and 
capitalization  of,  31;  capitalization  of 
titles  of,  41;  italics  for  titles  of,  60. 

Botanical  Gazette:    exception  to  rule  for 


capitalization  of  titles  of  publications 
in,  41,  note;  to  hyphenization  of  com- 
pounds of  "co-,"  etc.,  203,  note;  to  rule 
for  italics,  60,  note;  to  rule  for  quotation 
marks,  82,  note;  metric  symbols  in, 
123,  note;  footnotes  in,  239,  note;  thou- 
sands in,  159,  note. 

Botanical  terms:  use  of  capitals  in,  46; 
of  italics,  46,  71. 

Bourgeois,  explained,  252. 

Box-heads:  defined,  282;  how  to  set, 
242,  illustrated,  250;  omission  of 
period  after,  125;  use  of  capitals  in, 
41. 

Brackets,  rules  for  use  of,  178-79. 

Break,  or  change,  in  sentence,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  166. 

Breakline:  defined,  217;  spacing  of,  267. 

Brevier,  explained,  252. 

"Brother,"  compounds  of,  190. 

"Brothers,"  forming  part  of  name  of 
firm,  107. 

Buildings,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

But-clauses,  use  of  comma  in  connection 
with,  144. 

"By-,"  compounds  with,  202. 

C,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Capitalization:  of  abbreviations  of  aca- 
demic degrees,  etc.,  22;  of  adjectives 
derived  from  proper  nouns,  i;  of 
adjectives  and  nouns  designating  defi- 
nite geographical  regions,  5;  of  books 
of  the  Bible,  31;  of  conventions,  con- 
gresses, expositions,  etc.,  17;  of  creeds 
and  confessions  of  faith,  19;  of  Egyptian 
dynasties,  13;  of  epithets,  used  as  proper 
names,  2;  of  exclamations  "O"  and 
"Oh,"  40,  117;  of  feast-days,  20;  of 
geographical  names,  4-5;  of  geological 
epochs,  14,  46;  of  governmental  depart- 
ments, 12;  of  historical  epochs,  14;  of 
important  events,  15;  of  legisktive, 
judiciary,  and  administrative  bodies, 
12;  of  linguistic  and  literary  periods, 
14,  123;  of  miscellaneous  terms,  33;  of 
miscellaneous  historical  terms,  9,  16;  of 
monastic  orders,  10;  of  names  for  the 
Bible,  29;  of  names  of  regiments,  13; 
of  names  and  epithets  of  peoples,  races, 
and  tribes,  47;  of  names  of  bodies  of 
solar  system,  48;  of  "nature,"  etc.,  and 
abstract  ideas,  personified,  26;  of  nouns 
and  adjectives  used  to  designate  the 
Supreme  Being,  or  any  member  of  the 
Trinity,  24;  of  organizations  and  insti- 
tutions, 11-12;  of  particles  (in  French, 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEX 


129 


Dutch,  German  names),  3;  of  philo- 
sophical, literary,  and  artistic  schools,  9; 
of  political  alliances,  16;  of  political 
divisions,  6-7;  of  political  parties,  g,  16; 
of  pronouns  referring  to  the  Supreme 
Being,  24;  of  proper  nouns  and  adjec- 
tives, i,  5,  53;  of  regions  or  parts  of 
world,  5;  of  terms  applied  to  groups  of 
states,  5 ;  of  religious  denominations,  9; 
of  sessions  of  Congress,  13;  of  thorough- 
fares, parks,  squares,  blocks,  buildings, 
etc.,  8;  of  titles,  academic  degrees, 
orders  (decorations),  etc.,  21  (cf.  49); 
of  titles  of  publications,  41;  of  treaties, 
acts,  laws,  bills,  etc.,  18;  of  versions 
of  the  Bible,  30;  of  words  with  an  ac- 
quired, limited,  or  special  meaning, 
25;  verbs  derived  from  proper  names 
not  capitalized,  i;  rules  for,  1-57;  word 
lists,  4. 

Capitals:  how  indicated,  257;  rules  for 
use  of,  1-49. 

Capitals  and  small  capitals,  rules  for  use 

of,  50,  51. 
Caps.    See  Capitals. 

Catalogues,  designation  of  celestial  ob- 
jects in,  71. 

Center-heads:  defined,  279;  illustrated, 
279;  use  of  capitals  in,  41. 

"  Centigrade,"  abbreviation  for,  in. 

Centuries,  numbers  of,  to  be  spelled  out, 

too. 
Cf.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

Chapters,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Chemical  symbols,  how  to  treat,  71, 123. 

Christian  names,  to  be  spelled  out,  93. 

"Church,"  when  capitalized,  28. 

Church  fathers:  omission  of  "St."  hi  con- 
nection with  names  of,  108;  when  capi- 
talized, 27. 

Citations:  from  different  authors  follow- 
ing each  other  uninterrupted  by  any 
intervening  original  matter,  75;  of  pas- 
sages in  author's  own  words,  74  (cf. 
85);  rules  for  reduction  of,  85-87;  for 
punctuation  of,  112. 

Civil  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

Classical  references,  rules  for  punctuation, 
237. 

Clauses:  adverbial,  150;  antithetical, 
149;  appositional,  150;  complementary, 
169;  conjunctive,  144;  parenthetical, 


150,  167,  169,  177;  participial,  148; 
summarizing,  170. 

"Cleared,"  definition  of,  90. 

"Co-,"  compounds  with,  203. 

Colon:  definition  and  illustration  of  use 
of,  131;  rules  for  use  of,  131-36;  use 
of,  after  salutatory  phrase  at  beginning 
of  letters,  133;  between  place  of  publi- 
cation and  publisher's  name,  135;  in 
connection  with  introductory  remarks 
of  speaker,  133;  to  emphasize  close 
connection  between  two  clauses,  131; 
to  introduce  statement,  extract,  etc., 
131;  to  separate  chapter  and  verse  in 
Scripture  passages,  134;  clause  from 
illustration  or  amplification,  131;  hours 
and  minutes  in  time-indications,  134. 

Columns  of  figures,  spacing  of,  245. 

Combination  of  words  into  one  adjective 
preceding  noun,  use  of  hyphen  for,  183. 

Comma:  definition  and  illustrations  of 
use  of,  141;  omission  of,  between  two 
adjectives,  147;  in  signatures  and  after 
author's  name  at  beginning  of  articles, 
161;  use  of,  after  digits  indicating 
thousands,  159;  before  "and,"  "or," 
and  "nor,"  143;  before  "of"  in  con- 
nection with  residence  or  position,  157; 
omission  of,  between  consecutive  pages, 
etc.,  158;  between  month  and  year,  160; 
in  connection  with  adjectival  phrases, 
152;  omitted  before  "rather,"  146; 
with  adverbial  clauses,  150;  with  anti- 
thetical clauses,  149;  with  appositional 
clauses,  150;  with  brief  quotations  or 
maxims,  156;  with  clauses  ending  in 
different  prepositions,  153;  with  con- 
junctions, 144;  with  conjunctions,  ad- 
verbs, connective  particles,  and  phrases, 
145;  with  parenthetical  clauses,  150; 
with  participial  clauses,  148;  to  indicate 
omissions,  155;  to  separate  identical,  or 
similar,  words,  151;  to  separate  num- 
bers, 154;  to  separate  proper  nouns, 
142;  rules  for  use  of,  141-62. 

Commercial:  firms,  how  to  treat  titles  of, 
107;  organizations  and  institutions, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  n. 

"Company,"  to  be  abbreviated  when 
forming  part  of  name  of  firm,  107. 

Complementary  clauses,  use  of  dashes  in 
connection  with,  169. 

Component  elements,  omission  of,  in  com- 
pound words,  211. 

Compound  adjectives,  183. 

Compound  words,  etymological  division 
of,  when  followed,  221;  omission  of 


130 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


element  common  to  two  or  more,  to 
be  indicated  by  hyphen,  211. 

Compounds:  hyphenated,  capitalization 
of  nouns  constituting  parts  of,  in  titles, 
45;  of  "book,"  "house,"  "mill," 
"room,"  "shop,"  "work,"  186;  of 
"father,"  "mother,"  "brother,"  "sister," 
"daughter,"  "parent,"  and  "foster," 
190;  of  "fellow,"  189;  of  "god,"  195; 
of  "half,"  "quarter,"  etc.,  196;  of 
"life"  and  "world,"  192;  of  "maker" 
and  "dealer,"  187;  of  "master,"  194; 
of  present  participles  with  nouns  or 
prepositions,  185;  of  "self,"  198;  of 
"skin,"  193;  of  "store,"  188;  with 
"ante,"  "anti,"  "inter,"  "intra," 
"post,"  "sub,"  and  "super,"  208; 
with  "by-,"  202;  with  "co-,"  "pre-," 
and  "re-,"  203;  with  "extra."  "infra," 
"pan,"  "supra,"  and  "ultra,"  209; 
with  "fold,"  199;  with  "great,"  in  lines 
of  descent,  191;  with  "like,"  200;  with 
negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  and 
"a-,"  205;  with  "non-,"  205;  with 
"over"  and  "under,"  207;  with 
"quasi-,"  206;  with  "semi-,"  "demi-," 
"tri-,"  "bi-,"  etc.,  197;  with  "vice," 
"ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and  "lieuten- 
ant," in  titles,  201. 

Confessions  of  faith,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  19. 

Congress:  capitalization  of  names  of 
houses  of,  12;  of  sessions  of,  13;  mem- 
bers of,  to  be  lower-cased,  21;  numbers 
of  sessions  of,  to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Congresses,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

Conjunctions,  use  of  comma  in  connection 

with,  145. 
Connective   particles,   use  of   comma  in 

connection  with,  145. 

"Continued":  after  headlines,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  73;  at  end  of  articles,  etc.,  to  be 
placed  between  brackets,  and  in  reduced 
type,  179. 

Contraction  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 
in,  163. 

Conventions,  capitalization  of  names  of,  1 7. 
Copyholders,  hints  to,  pp.  120-22. 
Creeds,   capitalization  of  names  of,    19. 

Cut-in-heads:  defined  and  illustrated, 
281;  omission  of  period  after,  125;  use 
of  capitals  in,  41. 

Cycles  of  poems,  titles  of:  capitalization 
of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  itali- 
cized, 60. 

"Czar,"  when  capitalized,  21. 


Dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index,  232  • 
Danish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42. 

Dashes :  definition  and  illustrations  of  use 
of,  1 66;  different  sizes  of,  explained, 
261;  illustrated,  261:  rules  for  use  of, 
166-75;  use  of,  at  end  of  word  or  phrase 
implied  at  beginning  of  each  of  succeed- 
ing paragraphs,  171;  for  emphasis,  168; 
in  connection  with  literary  references, 
174;  with  other  points,  175;  with 
parenthetical  clauses,  168-69;  with 
complementary  clauses,  169;  to  connect 
numbers,  173;  to  denote  break,  stop, 
transition,  or  change  in  sentence,  166; 
to  precede  summarizing  clauses,  170. 

Dates:  hundreds  repeated,  when  and 
when  not,  173;  of  publications,  to  follow 
volume  numbers  in  references  to  periodi- 
cals, 237;  st,  d,  and  th  to  be  omitted 
from,  102;  use  of  comma  between 
month  and  year  in,  160. 

"Daughter,"  compounds  of,  190. 

"De,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  240. 

"Dealer,"  compounds  of,  187. 

Decades,  references  to,  to  be  spelled  out, 

101. 

Decorations,  capitalization  of  names  of,  21. 

Degrees,  academic,  abbreviation  and  capi- 
talization of,  21-22. 

"Demi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Denominations,  religious,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  9. 

Departments:  governmental,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  12;  of  University  of 
Chicago,  49. 

Derivation,  division  according  to,  to  be 
avoided,  221. 

Derivatives:  from  Greek  and  Latin,  115; 
from  proper  names,  53;  English,  from 
scientific  names  not  capitalized,  46; 
from  words  ending  in  /,  how  to  divide, 
227. 

Diagrams,  letters  referring  to,  68. 

Digraphs.    See  Ligature. 

Diphthongs,  to  be  treated  as  one  letter  in 
divisions,  226. 

Divided  word  to  be  avoided:  at  end  of 
next  to  last  line  of  paragraph,  217;  at 
bottom  of  recto  page,  217. 

Division  of  words:  rules  for,  215-31; 
systems  of,  221;  use  of  hyphen  to  indi- 
cate, 182;  avoidance  of  unnecessary, 
215;  on  two  letters,  to  be  avoided,  216; 
of  foreign  words,  231. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEX 


Divisional  mark  in  middle  of  sentences, 
not  to  be  put  at  end  of  line,  220. 

Divisions  of  publications,  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  82. 

Divisions,  political:  capitalization  of 
names  of,  6-7;  numbered,  to  be  spelled 
out,  100. 

Divisions  of  the  University  of  Chicago, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  49- 

Documents,  titles  of:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized, 
60  (cf.  18). 

Double  dagger,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 
232. 

Double  rules,  use  of,  in  tables,  247. 

Doubt,  use  of  interrogation  point  to  ex- 
press, 129. 

Drop-folio,  denned,  201. 

Dutch  names,  capitalizing  of  "Van"  and 
"Ten"  in,  3;  indexing  of,  240;  titles  of 
publications,  use  of  capitals  in,  42. 

Dynasties,  Egyptian:  capitalization  of 
names  of,  13;  to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Editors,  hints  to,  pp.  113-16. 

Educational  organizations  and  institu- 
tions, capitalization  of  names  of,  u. 

E.g.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 

"Elect,"  suffixed  to  titles,  201. 

Ellipses:  rules  for  use  of,  180-81;  to  be 
treated  as  part  of  quotation,  88,  181; 
use  of,  to  indicate  omissions,  180. 

Em,  defined,  261. 

Em  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261; 
use  of,  for  "to"  in  time-indications, 
173- 

Emphasis:  use  of  dashes  for,  168;  of 
exclamation  points,  127;  of  italics,  58. 

Em  quad,  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261. 

En  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261; 
use  of,  instead  of  comma  between  con- 
secutive pages  in  literary  references,  158 
(cf.  173);  instead  of  hyphen,  in  com- 
pounds, 183;  for  "to"  connecting  two 
words  or  figures,  173. 

English:  equivalent  of  foreign  word  or 
phrase,  to  be  quoted,  78;  system  of 
division,  221;  titles  of  publications,  use 
of  capitals  in,  41. 

En  quad:  defined,  261;  illustrated,  261. 

Enumerations,  use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with  letters  or  figures  used  to 
indicate  subdivisions  in,  176. 


Epigrammatic  turn,  use  of  dash  to  indi- 
cate, 166. 

Epithets,  capitalized,  when  used  as  proper 
names,  2. 

Epochs,  historical  and  geological,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  14. 

Equivalent,  English,  of  word  or  phrase 
from  foreign  language,  to  be  roman- 
quoted,  78. 

Errata,  for  and  read  italicized  in,  62. 

Essays,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

Etc.:  use  of  comma  before,  143;  when 
to  be  treated  as  part  of  quotation,  88. 

Etymology,  division  according  to  (Eng- 
lish system),  221. 

eu,  form  of  indefinite  article  before,  114. 

Even  spacing,  importance  of,  265. 

Events,  important  historical,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  15. 

"Ex-,"  prefixed  to  titles,  201. 

Exclamation  point,  rules  for  use  of,  127- 
28. 

Exclamatory  "Oh,"  117. 

Explanation:  of  technical  terms,  251-94; 
use  of  brackets  for,  178. 

Expositions,  capitalization  of  names  of,  17. 

"Extra,"  compounds  with,  209. 

Extracts,  rules  for  punctuation  of,  112. 

F.,  ff.  (= "following"):  spacing  of,  269, 
use  of,  no. 

Face,  defined,  256. 

"Fahrenheit,"  abbreviation  for,  in. 

"Farther"  and  "further,"  differentiation 
of,  116. 

"Father":  compounds  of,  190;  when 
capitalized,  27. 

Feast  days,  capitalization  of  names  of,  20. 

"Fellow,"  compounds  of,  189. 

Figures:  columns  of,  in  tables,  245;  rules 
for  use  of,  94-98. 

Figures  (illustrations)  in  text,  letters  re- 
ferring to,  68. 

Firms,  names  of  commercial:  abbrevia- 
tion of,  107;  capitalization  of,  n. 

First  words:  after  a  colon,  when  capital- 
ized, 35;  following  "Whereas"  and 
"Resolved"  in  resolutions,  capitali- 
zation of,  39;  in  sections  of  enumera- 
tion, when  capitalized,  36;  in  titles  of 
publications,  capitalization  of,  41;  of 
citations,  when  capitalized,  38  (cf.  131); 


132 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


of  lines  of  poetry,  capitalization  of,  34; 
of  quotations,  when  lower-case  is  used 
for,  57  (cf.  131);  of  sentences,  capitali- 
zation of,  34. 

Five-em  space,  denned,  261. 

"Flush,"  defined,  280. 

"Fold,"  combinations  with,  199. 

Folio,  denned,  291. 

Font,  defined,  257. 

Footnotes:  exceptions  to  general  style 
for,  237,  239,  note;  general  style  for,  237; 
indices  for  references  to,  232;  number- 
ing of,  239;  placing  of  index  figure,  236; 
rules  for,  232-39;  samples  of,  237;  to 
tables,  234. 

Foreign  institutions  and  organizations, 
capitalization  of  titles  of,  n. 

Foreign  languages:  division  of  words  in, 
231;  English  translation  accompany- 
ing word,  phrase,  or  passage  cited  from, 
to  be  quoted,  78;  sentences  and  passages 
quoted  from,  how  to  treat,  59, 85;  words 
and  phrases  from,  use  of  italics  for,  §9; 
words  and  phrases  borrowed  from,  in- 
corporated into  English,  how  to  treat, 
59- 

Foreign  titles  of  publications,  capitaliza- 
tion of,  42. 

"Format"  of  books  (410,  8vo,  etc.),  not 
to  be  treated  as  abbreviations,  123. 

Formulae,  spacing  of,  273. 

"Fort,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 

"Foster,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Foul  proof,  defined,  288. 

Foundry-proof,  defined,  287. 

Four-em  space,  defined,  261. 

Fractions,  use  of  hyphen  in,  210. 

French:  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42;  use  of  ligatures  a  or  <K  in, 
115;  words,  division  of,  231. 

"Further"  and  "farther,"  differentiation 
of,  116. 

G,  soft,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 
Galley,  defined,  285. 
Galley-proof,  defined,  285. 
''General,"  combined  with  title,  201. 
Geographical  names,  capitalization  of,  4, 

5,6- 
Geological  terms,  capitalization  of,  14,  46; 

italicizing  of,  71. 
Geometry,  letters  used  to  designate  lines, 

etc.,  in,  67. 
German  names  with  umlaut,  indexing  of, 


240;  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42;  words,  division  of,  231. 

Given  names.     Set  Christian  names. 

"God,"  compounds  of,  195. 

Governmental  departments,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  12. 

Grain,  abbreviation  for,  in. 

Gram,  abbreviation  for,  in. 

"Great,"  compounds  of,  191. 

Greek  words,  division  of,  231. 

H,  form  of  indefinite  article  before  sounded, 
114. 

Hair-space,  defined,  261. 

Hair-spacing,  tabooed,  266. 

"Half,"  combinations  of,  with  nouns,  196. 

Half-title,  defined,  292. 

Hanging  indention:  defined  and  illus- 
trated, 279,  284;  indention  in,  274. 

Headings,  described,  279-83. 

Headlines:  of  tables,  how  to  set,  249; 
omission  of  period  after,  125;  spacing 
of,  271;  word  '"continued"  following, 
to  be  set  in  italics,  73. 

Heads.    See  Headings,  Headlines. 

Historical:  epochs,  capitalization  of  appel- 
lations for,  14;  events,  capitalization  of, 
15;  terms  of  special  significance,  capi- 
talization of,  16. 

Holidays.    See  Feast-days. 

Honorary  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 

"Horse-power,"  abbreviation  for,  HI. 

"House,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Hyphen  leader,  defined,  244. 

Hyphenated  words:  division  of,  to.  be 
avoided,  225;  list  of,  214. 

Hyphenization,  rules  for,  182-214. 

Hyphens:  number  of  consecutive,  allow- 
able at  ends  of  lines,  217;  rules  for  use 
of,  182-214. 

Ibid.,  use  of,  233. 

Ideas,   abstract,    capitalization  of,   when 

personified,    26. 
I.e.,  to  be  set  in  roman,  61. 
If-clauses,  use  of  comma  in  connection 

with,  144. 

Illustrations,  letters  referring  to  parts  of, 
68. 

Implication  of  word  or  phrase,  to  be  indi- 
cated by  dash,  171. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEX 


133 


Importance,  use  of  italics  for,  58. 

"In-"  (negative  particle),  compounds 
with,  205. 

Indentation.     See  Indention. 

Indention:  explained,  274;  rules  for, 
274-76. 

Index  figure,  placing  of,  236. 

Indexing:  italicizing  of  "See,"  "See  also," 
in  cross-references,  62;  rules  for,  240; 
treatment  of  prefixes  and  particles  in 
proper  nouns,  240. 

Indices  for  footnote  references:  how  to 
number,  240;  placing  of,  236;  sequence 
of,  232;  what  to  use  for,  232. 

Industrial  organizations  and  institutions, 
capitalization  of  names  of,  n. 

"Infra,"  compounds  with,  209. 

Initials:  of  titles  of  publications,  use  of, 
123;  separation  of,  in  different  lines,  to 
be  avoided,  210. 

Institutions:  capitalization  of  names  of, 
ii ;  use  of  roman  type  for  foreign,  59. 

"Inter,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Interpolations,  use  of  brackets  for,  178. 

Interrogation  point,  use  of,  129-30. 

"Intra,"  compounds  with,  208. 

Ironical  word  or  phrase:  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  77;  use  of  exclamation 
point  for,  127. 

•ise  and  -ize,  differentiation  between,  as 
terminations,  120. 

Italian  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42;  words,  division  of,  231. 

Italics:  defined,  254;  how  indicated,  254; 
need  not  be  used  in  lengthy  biblio- 
graphical lists,  60;  rules  for  use  of, 
58-73. 

Italicizing:  of  address  lines,  64;  of  astro- 
nomical names,  71;  of  letters  designating 
unknown  quantities,  67;  of  letters  refer- 
ring to  letters  in  illustrations,  68;  of 
names  of  genera  and  species,  71;  of 
initial  word,  Resolved,  72;  of  names  of 
catalogues  of  planets,  constellations,  and 
stars,  71;  of  symbols  indicating  sub- 
divisions, 66;  of  symbols  for  shillings  and 
pence,  70;  of  titles  or  position  after  sig- 
natures, 65;  of  titles  of  books  and  other 
works,  60;  of  titles  of  legal  causes  and 
proceedings,  63;  of  titles  of  newspapers, 
to  include  name  of  city  where  published, 
when,  60;  of  words  for  and  read  in 
errata,  126;  of  words  "See"  and  "See 
also"  in  cross-references  in  indexing,  62; 
of  words  and  phrases  to  which  emphasis 
is  to  be  given,  58;  of  words  and  phrases 


from  foreign  languages,  59;  of  words 
used  in  literary  references,  61;  of  words 
representing  continuation  of  article  or 
chapter,  73. 

J,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Journals.    See  Periodicals. 

Judiciary  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  12. 
Juridical  acts,  laws,  bills,  capitalization  of 

names  of,  18. 
"Justification,"  defined,  264. 

"Kaiser,"  when  capitalized,  21. 
Kern,  defined,  256. 

Lanston.    See  Monotype. 

Last  words,  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41. 

Latin:  non-use  of  ligature  a  and  a?  in, 
115;  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  42;  words,  division  of  231. 

Laws,  juridical,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  18. 

"Leaded,"  defined,  277. 
Leaders,  definition  and  use  of,  244. 
Leads:  defined,  277. 

Lectures,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Legends,  omission  of  period  after,  125. 

Legislative  bodies,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  12. 

Letters:  in  text  or  legends  referring  to 
corresponding  letter  in  accompanying 
illustrations  (diagrams),  68;  references 
to  particular,  to  be  set  in  italics,  69. 

"Lieutenant,"  combined  with  other  title, 
201. 

"Life,"  compounds  of,  192. 

Ligature  a  and  ce,  use  of,  115. 

"Like,"  adjectives  ending  in,  82,  200. 

Linguistic  periods:  abbreviation  of  names 
for,  123;  capitalization  of,  14. 

Linotype  machine  (Mergenthaler) :  de- 
scribed, 294;  how  to  number  footnotes 
in  matter  set  on,  239;  spacing  on,  260; 
use  of  leaders  in  tables  set  on,  244. 

List:  of  hyphenated  words,  214;  of  words 
of  more  than  one  spelling,  119. 

Literary  references:  abbreviations  in,  54, 
107,  no,  237;  words  representing  divi- 
sions, when  capitalized,  37;  list  of 
phrases  and  abbreviations  used  in,  61. 


134 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Literary  schools,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  9- 

Loc.  cii.,  use  of,  233. 
Long  primer,  explained,  252. 
Lower  case:    defined,  257;     for  English 

derivatives  from  scientific  names,  46; 

rules  for  use  of,  53-57. 

Machines,    type-setting,    different    styles 

of,  293-94. 

Magazines.    See  Periodicals. 
"Maker,"  compounds  of,  187. 
Make-up,  defined,  200. 
"Manuscript,"  abbreviation  for,  44,  123. 
Manuscripts,  titles  of:  to  be  set  in  roman, 

60;  use  of  capitals  in,  44. 
"Master,"  compounds  of,  194. 
Mathematical  signs,  spacing  of,  273. 
Measurement,  units  of,  spelled  with  lower- 
case initial  letter,  55. 

Measures,  metric,  how  to  designate,  in. 
Medical  terms,  capitalization  of,  46;   use 

of  italics  in,  to  be  avoided,  71. 
"Mac,"  "Me,"  "M',"  rule  for  treatment 

of,  240. 

Mergenthaler.     See  Linotype. 
Metric:  symbols,  how  to  treat,  123 ;  spacing 

of,  269;   system,  designation  of  weights 

and  measures  in,  in. 
Military  titles,  capitalization  of,  21. 
"Mill,"  compounds  of,  186. 
Minion,  explained,  252. 
Miscellaneous  terms,  capitalization  of,  33. 
Monastic  orders,  capitalization  of  names 

of,  10. 

Monetary  symbols,  spacing  of,  270. 
Money,  sums  of,  how  to  treat,  97. 
Monotype  machine  (Lanston),  described, 

293;  spacing  on,  259. 
Months,  names  of,  when  to  be  spelled 

I      OUt,    IO2. 

"Mother,"  compounds  of,  100. 

Mottoes:  capitalization  of  principal  words 

in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted,  82. 
"Mount,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 
Movements,    historical,  capitalization    of 
of,  16. 


"Namely,"  use  of   colon   in    connection 

with,  132. 
Names:  alphabetization  of,  240;  Christian, 

to  be  spelled  out,  93;  familiar,  applied 


to  particular  persons,  to  be  capitalized, 
21 ;  proper,  capitalization  of,  i. 

Nature,  personified,  capitalization  .of,  26. 

Negative  particles  "un-,"  "in-,"  and 
"a-,"  compounds  with,  205. 

Newspapers,  titles  of:  the  article  not  to  be 
treated  as  part  of,  43;  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41 ;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

New  Testament  books,  list  of  abbrevia- 
tions for,  109. 

Nobility,  capitalization  of  titles  of,  21. 

"Non-,"  compounds  with,  205. 

Nonpareil,  explained,  252. 

"Nor,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  143, 

"Not,"  use  of  comma  before,  in  anti- 
thetical clauses,  149. 

"Note"  introducing  note  not  a  footnote, 
use  of  cap  and  small  caps  for,  51. 

"Nothing,"  not  to  be  divided,  230. 

Nouns:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications, 41;  combination  of,  standing 
in  objective  relation  to  each  other,  184; 
ending  in  a  sibilant,  formation  of  plural 
of,  165;  followed  by  numeral,  capitali- 
zation of,  37  (cf.  no);  proper,  capi- 
talization of,  i  (cf.  5,  53). 

Numbered  political  divisions,  capitaliza- 
tion of  names  of,  7. 

Numbers:  commencing  a  sentence,  to  be 
spelled  out,  96;  consecutive,  treatment 
of,  159,  173;  in  connected  groups  to  be 
treated  alike,  94;  in  groups  of  six  or 
more  closely  connected,  to  be  set  in 
figures,  94;  of  less  than  three  digits,  to 
be  spelled  out  in  ordinary  reading-matter, 
94;  round,  treatment  of,  95;  use  of 
comma  after  digits  indicating  thousands, 
159;  use  of  comma  to  separate,  154; 
use  of  dash  for  "to"  connecting,  173. 

Numerals:  Arabic,  at  beginning  of  lines 
and  in  headlines,  spacing  of,  271; 
Roman,  at  beginning  of  lines  and  in 
headlines,  spacing  of,  271;  omission  of 
period  after,  124. 

"O"  and  "Oh":  capitalization  of,  40; 
differentiation  in  use  of,  117. 

"O',"  rule  for  treatment  of,  in  indexing, 
240. 

Occupations,   compounds    denoting,    187. 

ce,  rules  for  use  of,  115. 

Officers:  titles  of,  to  be  lower-cased,  21; 
of  University  of  Chicago,  to  be  capi- 
talized, 49. 

Offices,  capitalization  of  names  of,  12,  21. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:   INDEX 


135 


Old  Testament  books,  list  of  abbreviations 
for,  109. 

Omission:  of  comma  after  signatures, 
etc.,  161;  of  figures  in  numbers  or  letters 
in  middle  of  word,  use  of  apostrophe 
for,  163;  of  period  after  headlines,  etc., 
125;  after  Roman  numerals,  124;  of  s, 
d,  and  th  in  dates,  102 ;  of  word  or  words, 
indicated  by  comma,  155;  use  of  brack- 
ets for,  178;  of  ellipsis,  180. 

"One,"  "once,"  etc.,  form  of  indefinite 
article  before,  114. 

Op.  cit.,  use  of,  233. 

Open  tables:  headlines  for,  242;  how  to 
set,  241 ;  specimen  of,  250. 

"Or,"  when  comma  is  used  before,  143. 

Orders  (decorations),  capitalization  of 
names  of,  21. 

Orders,  monastic,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  10. 

Ordinals:  when  capitalized,  13;  when 
not,  45. 

Organizations,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
ii. 

Outcry,  use  of  exclamation  point  after,  127. 

"Over,"  compounds  with,  207. 

Pages,  etc.,  omission  of  comma  with  four 
digits,  when,  159;  symbol  "p."  to  be 
used,  when,  237 ;  use  of  en-dash  between 
consecutive,  158  (cf.  173). 

Page-proof,  defined,  286. 

Paleontological  terms:  use  of  capitals  in, 
46;  of  italics,  71. 

Pamphlets,  titles  of:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized, 
60. 

Papers  (addresses),  titles  of:  capitaliza- 
tion of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  82. 

Parables,  biblical,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  32. 

Paragraph  mark:  spacing  of,  269;  use  of, 
for  footnote  index,  232. 

Paragraphs:  explained,  284;  first  lines  of, 
in  quoted  prose  matter  to  begin  with 
quotation  marks,  89;  indention  of,  274; 
styles  of,  276  (cf.  284). 

Parallel  mark,  use  of,  for  footnote  index, 
232. 

"Parent,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Parentheses:  rules  for  use  of,  176-77; 
use  of,  for  parenthetical  clauses,  177 
(cf.  150, 167);  in  connection  with  figures 
or  letters  indicating  subsections  176; 


within  parentheses,  use  of  brackets  for, 
178. 

Parenthesis:  placing  of  period  in  connec- 
tion with,  126. 

Parenthetical  clauses:  use  of  commas  in 
connection  with,  150;  of  dashes,  167, 
169;  of  parentheses,  177  (cf.  150,  167). 

Parks,  capitalization  of  names  of,  8. 

Participial  clauses,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  148. 

Participle:  omission  or  retention  of  final 
e  in  original  word,  when,  118;  present, 
united  with  noun,  or  with  preposition, 
185. 

Particles,  in  French,  Dutch,  and  German 
names,  capitalization  of,  3. 

Parties,  political,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  9- 

Parts  (of  books,  etc.),  titles  of:  capitali- 
zation of  principal  words  in,  41;  to  be 
roman-quoted,  82. 

Pause,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  166. 

Pearl,  explained,  252. 

Pence.    See  Shillings. 

Peoples,  races,  and  tribes,  capitalization 
of  names  or  epithets  of,  47. 

Per  cent:  to  be  expressed  in  figures,  94; 
not  to  be  treated  as  an  abbreviation, 
123. 

Percentages:  columns  of,  in  tables,  some- 
times in  distinctive  type,  241. 

Period:  placing  of,  in  connection  with 
quotation  marks,  126;  rules  for  use 
of,  122-26;  to  be  omitted  after  abbre- 
viations for  linguistic  epochs,  123;  after 
headlines,  125;  after  initials  of  titles  of 
publications,  123;  after  MS  (^manu- 
script), 123;  use  of,  after  abbreviations, 
123;  at  end  of  sentence,  122  (cf.  125); 
in  classical  references,  237,  239,  note. 

Period  leader,  defined,  244. 

Periodicals,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  definite  article  not 
to  be  treated  as  part  of,  43;  to  be 
italicized,  60. 

Periods,  geological,  historical,  linguistic, 
and  literary,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
14. 

Personifications,  capitalization  of,  26. 

Philosophical  schools,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  9. 

Phrases:  adjectival,  use  of  comma  in  con- 
nection with,  152;  conjunctional,  etc., 
145- 

Pica,  explained,  252. 


136 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Place  of  publication  and  publisher's  name, 

use  of  colon  between,  135. 
Place-names,  foreign,  how  to  treat,  59. 
Plain  paragraph:   denned  and  illustrated, 

284;  indention  of,  274. 
Plate-proof,  denned,  287. 
Planets,  names  of,  how  treated,  71. 

Plays,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  principal 
words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

Plurals:  formation  of,  165;  of  abbreviations 
in  literary  references,  how  formed,  no; 
of  nouns,  not  divisible  if  singulars  are 
not,  228;  of  numerals,  formation  of,  165. 

P.M.  (post  meridiem):  spacing  of,  52,  219; 
use  of  small  caps  for,  52. 

Poems :  capitalization  of  6rst  word  of  each 
line  in  English,  34;  of  first  word  of  each 
paragraph  in  Greek  and  Latin,  34;  of 
principal  words  in  titles  of,  41;  titles 
of  shorter,  to  be  roman-quoted,  81 
(cf.  60);  titles  of,  when  set  in  italics 
and  when  in  roman,  60. 

Poetry :  indention  of ,  2  75 ;  quotations  from , 
when  to  reduce,  85;  when  to  run  into 
the  text,  85. 

Point  system,  explanation  of,  251-52. 

Political:  alliances,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  16;  divisions,  6-7;  organizations.il; 
parties,  9. 

"Pope,"  when  capitalized,  21. 

"Port,"  to  be  spelled  out,  104. 

Position,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  157. 

Possessive  case,  how  formed,  113,  164. 

"Post,"  compounds  with,  208. 

"Pre-,"  compounds  with,  203. 

Preface,  etc.,  quotation  marks  to  be  omit- 
ted with,  82. 

Prefix  or  suffix  not  complete  in  itself,  to 
be  indicated  by  hyphen,  212. 

Prefixes  "co-,"  "pre-,"  and  "re-,"  how 
to  treat,  203. 

Prepositions:  formation  of  nouns  of  pres- 
ent participles  in  connection  with,  185; 
to  be  lower-cased  in  titles,  41;  use  of 
comma  in  connection  with  clauses  end- 
ing in  different,  153. 

"President,"  when  capitalized,  21,  49. 

Principal  words:  capitalization  of,  in  titles 
of  publications,  41;  definition  of,  41. 

Proceedings  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41;  to 
be  italicized,  60. 


Pronouns:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of 
publications,  41;  referring  to  Deity,  24. 

Pronunciation,  division  according  to 
(American  system),  221. 

Proofreaders:  hints  to,  pp.  117-19;  marks 
of,  p.  123. 

Proofs,  description  of,  285-89. 

Proper  names:  capitalization  of,  i;  how 
to  form  possessive  of,  113;  verbs  and 
adjectives  derived  from,  use  of  lower 
case  for,  53. 

Proper  nouns:  capitalization  of,  i,  5,  53; 
division  of,  to  be  avoided,  218. 

Prose:  extracts,  when  to  reduce,  85; 
when  to  run  into  text,  85;  indention 
of  paragraphs  in,  274. 

Publications:  period  to  be  omitted  after 
initials  used  as  abbreviations  for,  123; 
titles  of,  capitalization  of  principal 
words  in,  41;  titles  of  subdivisions  of, 
when  to  be  roman-quoted,  82;  use  of 
italics  for,  60;  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
105. 

Punctuation:  of  extracts  from  modern 
authors,  112;  rules  for,  121-214. 

Punctuation  marks:  omission  of,  in  clas- 
sical references,  237;  placing  of,  with 
reference  to  indices  in  text,  232;  to  be 
printed  in  same  type  as  word  or  letter 
preceding  them,  121. 

"Pyramid, "explained  and  illustrated,  279. 

Quad,  defined,  261. 

Quadrat.     See  Quad. 

"Quarter,"  compounds  of,  196. 

4to,  8yo,  etc.,  not  to  be  treated  as  abbre- 
viations, 123. 

"Quasi-,"  compounds  with,  206. 

Query,  use  of  interrogation  point  for,  129. 

Question  mark.     See  Interrogation  point. 

Questions:  direct,  to  be  followed  by  inter- 
rogation point,  129;  indirect,  not  to 
be  followed  by  interrogation  point,  129. 

Quotation  marks:  not  to  be  used  in  con- 
nection with  reduced  citations,  87; 
exception  to  this  rule,  75;  placing  of 
colon  in  connection  with,  136;  of 
comma,  162;  of  ellipsis,  181;  of  excla- 
mation point,  128;  of  interrogation 
point,  130;  of  period,  126;  rules  for 
use  of,  74-01;  to  be  omitted  in 
references  to  Preface,  Index,  etc.,  82; 
use  of  double  and  single,  91. 

Quotations,  how  to  treat,  74-91;  first  word 
of,  lower-cased  when  connected  with 
previous  sentence,  57. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEX 


137 


Races,  tribes,  and  peoples,  capitalization 
of  names  or  epithets  of,  47. 

"Railroad"  and  "Railway,"  to  be  spelled 
out,  104. 

"Re-,"  compounds  with,  203. 

Reading-matter  in  columns  of  ruled  tables, 
how  to  set,  246. 

Recto,  defined,  283. 

Reductions:  rules  for,  85-87,  179;  scale 
of,  86. 

Reference  indices,  what  to  use  for,  232. 

References,  legal,  list  of  words  and  phrases 
used  in,  61;  literary:  list  of  words  to 
be  abbreviated  in,  no  (cf.  37,  54, 
237);  punctuation  of,  etc.,  237,  239, 
note;  use  of  dash  in  connection  with, 
174. 

"Reformer,"  when  capitalized,  27. 

Regiments,  capitalization  of  names  of,  13. 

Regions  or  parts  of  the  world,  capitali- 
zation of  names  of,  5. 

Regular  paragraph.     See  Plain  paragraph. 

Religious :  denominations,  capitalization 
of  names  of,  9;  organizations,  n. 

Residence,  use  of  comma  before  "of"  in 
connection  with,  157. 

Resolutions:  how  to  introduce  para- 
graphs in,  39,  51,  72;  word  "Resolved" 
in,  how  to  set,  72;  word  "Whereas," 
Si- 

"Resolved,"  in  resolutions,  to  be  set  in 
italics,  72. 

Revise,  defined,  289. 

Rhymed  lines,  in  poetry,  indention  of, 
275- 

Roman  numerals:  at  beginning  of  lines, 
spacing  of,  271;  in  headlines,  spacing 
of,  271;  omission  of  period  after,  124. 

"Roman-quote,"  defined,  74,  253. 

Roman  type,  defined,  253. 

"Room,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Round  numbers,  definition  and  treatment 
of,  95- 

Ruled  tables:  box-heads  for,  242;  how 
to  set,  241;  reading-matter  in,  246; 
specimens  of,  250. 

Rules:  double,  use  of,  in  tables,  247; 
rules  for  use  of,  in  tables,  243. 

"Run  in,"  defined,  280. 

Running-heads:  defined,  283;  omission 
of  period  after,  125;  hint  for  setting  of, 
283. 

Run-overs,  avoidance  of,  266. 


Sacred  books,  capitalization  of  names 
of,  29. 

"Saint":  to  be  omitted  in  connection 
with  names  of  apostles,  church  fathers, 
etc.,  108;  when  abbreviated,  108. 

Salutatory  phrase  at  beginning  of  letters, 
rules  for  setting,  50. 

Scandinavian  titles  of  publications,  use  of 
capitals  in,  42. 

Schools,  philosophical,  literary,  and  artis- 
tic, capitalization  of  names  of,  9. 

Scientific  terms,  use  of  capitals  in,  46;  of 
italics  in,  71. 

Scripture  passages:  names  of  books  of 
Bible  to  be  abbreviated  in,  109;  punc- 
tuation of,  134,  139;  spacing  of,  272. 

"Section,"  introducing  paragraphs  and 
followed  by  a  number,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  51. 

Section  mark:  spacing  of,  269;  use  of, 
for  footnote  index,  232. 

Sects,  religious,  capitalization  of  names  of, 
9- 

See  and  See  also  italicized  when,  62. 

"Self,"  compounds  of,  198. 

"Semi-,"  compounds  with,  197. 

Semicolon:  separating  two  or  more  dis- 
tinct clauses  in  enumerations,  36;  illus- 
tration of  use  of,  compared  with  that  of 
comma,  137;  placing  of,  in  connection 
with  quotation  marks,  140;  rules  for 
use  of,  137-40;  use  of,  in  enumerations, 
138;  to  mark  division  of  sentence,  137; 
to  separate  passages  in  Scripture  refer- 
ences containing  chapters,  139. 

Sequences:  of  footnote  indices,  232;  of 
subdivisional  numberings,  176;  of  three 
or  more  links,  use  of  comma  before 
"and,"  "or,"  and  "nor"  in,  143. 

Serial  titles:  to  be  roman-quoted,  80. 

Series,  use  of  comma  before  final  "and," 
"or,"  and  "nor"  in,  143. 

Sermons,  titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

Shank,  defined,  256. 

Shillings  and  pence,  how  to  treat  abbre- 
viations for,  70. 

Ships,  names  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  83. 

"Shop,"  compounds  of,  186. 

"Short  and":  definition  of,  107;  when 
used,  104,  107. 

Short  words:  avoidance  of  divisions  of, 
216;  spacing  of,  268. 

Shoulder,   defined,   256. 


138         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Side-heads:  defined,  280;  omission  of 
period  after,  125;  use  of  dash  in  con- 
nection with,  172;  use  of  lower  case 
in,  56  (cf.  172). 

Signatures  at  end  of  letters  or  articles: 
omission  of  comma  after,  161;  of  period, 
125;  rules  for  setting  of,  50,  65. 

"Sister,"  compounds  of,  190. 

Sizes  of  type,  in  ordinary  use,  samples 
of,  252. 

"Skin,"  compounds  of,  193. 

Slug,  defined,  278. 

Small  caps:  defined,  257;  how  indicated, 
257;  use  of,  52;  in  tabular  work,  242, 
249;  in  headings,  279. 

Small  pica,  explained,  252. 

Social  organizations,  capitalization  of 
names  of,  n. 

Soft  c  or  g,  do  not  divide  on,  223. 

Solar  system,  capitalization  of  names  of 
bodies  in,  in  works  on  astronomy,  48. 

"Solid,"  defined,  277. 

Space,  omitted  between  components  of 
certain  abbreviations,  22,  52,  103. 

Spaces:  different  sizes  of,  explained,  259, 
261;  specimen  of  lines  spaced  with 
different  sizes  of,  261. 

Spacing:  in  foundry  type  (and  general) 
composition,  261-64;  in  linotype  compo- 
sition, 260;  in  monotype  composition, 
259;  its  effect  on  etymological  divisions, 
221;  of  divisional  signs,  269;  of  figure 
columns  hi  tables,  245;  of  formu- 
lae, 273;  of  headlines,  271;  of  metric 
symbols,  269;  of  monetary  symbols, 
270;  of  numerals  at  beginning  of  para- 
graphs, 271;  of  reading-matter  in  ruled 
tables,  246;  of  rules  in  tables,  243;  of 
Scripture  passages,  272;  of  short  words, 
268;  rules  for,  258-73;  standard,  262; 
what  is  considered  good,  262;  with 
different  sizes  of  spaces,  samples  of,  261 

Spanish  titles  of  publications,  use  of  capi- 
tals in  42;  words,  division  of,  231. 

Species,  scientific  names  of:  use  of  capi- 
tals in,  46;  of  italics,  71. 

Specimen  tables,  250. 

Spelled  out,  words,  phrases,  and  titles 
which  are  to  be,  92-105. 

Spelling:  list  of  words  of  more  than  one, 
119;  of  ages,  99;  of  books  of  Bible,  109; 
of  centuries,  100;  of  Christian  names, 
93;  of  "Company"  and  "Brothers" 
in  names  of  firms,  107;  of  decades,  101; 
of  Egyptian  dynasties,  100;  of  extracts 


from  modern  authors,  112;  from  Old 
English,  112;  of  indefinite  article  before 
h,  u,  etc.,  114;  of  metric  symbols,  in;  of 
names  of  months,  102;  of  names  of  pub- 
lications, 105;  of  names  of  regiments, 
100 ;  of  numbers  commencing  a  sentence, 
96;  of  numbers  of  less  than  three  digits, 
94;  of  possessives  of  proper  names 
ending  in  a  sibilant,  113;  of  "Railroad" 
and  "Railway,"  104;  of  round  numbers, 
95;  of  "Saint,"  108;  of  sessions  of 
Congress,  100;  of  states  and  territories, 
106;  of  sums  of  money,  97;  of  time  of 
day,  98;  of  titles,  92;  of  "United  States," 
103;  of  words  denoting  subsections,  in 
literary  references,  no;  rules  for,  92- 
120. 

Squares,   capitalization  of   names   of,   8. 
"St.,"  indexing  of  names  with,  240. 
Standard:     of    measurement    in    typog- 
raphy,   252;    space   used   to   separate 
words,  261. 

Stars,  names  of,  how  treated,  71. 
"State,"  when  capitalized,  38,  note. 
States  and  territories,  names  of:    list  of 
abbreviations  for,  106;  to  be  abbreviated 
when  following  those  of  towns,    106; 
names  of  groups  of,  5. 
Statistics,  treatment  of  numbers  in,  94. 
"Store,"  compounds  of,   188. 
Stub:    definition  of,  242;   head  for,  242. 
Styles  of  type,  253-57. 
"Sub,"  compounds  with,  208. 
Subdivisions:    hi  literary  references,  use 
of  lower   case  for,    54   (cf.  no,  237); 
letters  used  to  indicate,   to  be  set  in 
italics,  66;    use  of  parentheses  in  con- 
nection with,  66;   of  publications,  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in  titles  of, 
41;    titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted,  or 
capitalized  without  quotation  marks,  82. 
Suffix  or  prefix,  indicated  by  hyphen,  212. 
"Sultan,"  when  capitalized,  21. 
Summarizing   clauses,   use  of   dashes  in 

connection  with,  170. 
"Super,"  compounds  with,  208. 
Superior   figures,    use   of,   for   reference 

indices,  232,  234. 
Superscriptions,  omission  of  period  after, 

125- 

"Supra,"  compounds  with,  209. 
Supreme  Being,  capitalization  of  names 

for,  and  pronouns  referring  to,  24. 
Syllabi,  scheme  of  notation  and  inden- 
tion of  subdivisions  in,  176. 


MANUAL  OF  STYLE:  INDEX 


139 


Syllables,  hyphen  used  to  indicate,  213. 

Symbols:  chemical,  treatment  of,  71,  123; 
metric,  spacing  of,  269;  treatment  of, 
in,  123;  monetary,  spacing  of,  270; 
of  measurement,  abbreviation  of,  in; 
as  reference  indices,  232. 

Tables:  columns  representing  totals,  per- 
centages, etc.,  frequently  set  off  by  dif- 
ferent type,  241;  headlines  of,  how  to 
set,  249;  of  two  columns,  to  be  set  as 
open,  248;  of  more  than  two,  as  ruled, 
248;  open,  headlines  for  columns  in,  242; 
open,  how  to  set,  241;  ruled,  box-heads 
for,  242;  ruled,  how  to  set,  241;  rules 
for  setting  of,  241-50;  rules  for  use  of 
rules  in,  243,  247;  specimen,  250. 

Tabular  work,  rules  for,  241-50  (see 
Tables). 

Technical:  terms,  explanation  of  typo- 
graphical, 251-94;  words  or  phrases, 
use  of  quotation  marks  for,  77. 

"The"  not  to  be  treated  as  part  of  title  of 
newspapers  or  magazines,  43. 

Thick  space,  defined*  261. 

Thin  space,  defined,  261. 

Thin-spacing,  where  to  avoid,  265 

Thoroughfares:  capitalization  of  names 
of,  8;  numbers  forming  part  of  names 
of,  to  be  spelled  out,  100. 

Thousands,  use  of  comma  after  digits 
indicating,  159. 

Three-em  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated, 
261. 

Three-em  quad,  defined,  261. 

Three-em  space,  defined,  261. 

Time:  indications,  how  to  punctuate,  134; 
of  day,  how  to  treat,  98. 

Titles:  academic,  to  be  abbreviated,  22; 
civil  and  military,  capitalization  of,  21; 
honorary,  21;  in  direct  address,  21;  of 
nobility,  21;  not  capitalized  when 
spelled  out,  22;  preceding  names,  to  be 
spelled  out,  92;  list  of  exceptions,  92; 
"vice,"  "ex-,"  "elect,"  "general,"  and 
"lieutenant,"  constituting  parts  of,  how 
to  treat,  201. 

Titles  of  legal  causes  and  proceedings, 
italicized,  63. 

Titles  of  publications:  capitalization  of 
principal  words  in,  41;  use  of  capitals 
in:  English,  Latin,  French,  Italian, 
Spanish,  Scandinavian,  German,  Dan- 
ish, Dutch,  42;  use  of  italics  for,  60; 
of  roman-quoted,  80,  81,  82;  to  be 
correctly  quoted,  112;  when  to  be 
spelled  out,  105;  of  addresses,  82;  of 
articles,  82:  of  books,  60;  of  chapters 


82;  of  cycles  of  poems,  60;  of  di- 
visions of  books,  etc.,  82;  of  docu- 
ments, 60;  of  essays,  60;  of  lectures, 
82;  of  newspapers,  60;  of  pamphlets, 
60;  of  papers,  82;  of  periodicals,  60; 
of  plays,  60;  of  poems,  printed  in  sepa- 
rate volume,  60;  of  poems,  short, 
81  (cf.  60);  of  proceedings  of  societies, 
60;  of  series,  80;  of  tracts,  52;  of 
transactions  of  societies,  60;  of  treatises, 
60. 

Toasts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  roman-quoted, 
82. 

"To  be  continued,"  at  end  of  articles,  how 
to  set,  73,  179. 

"Today,"  "tonight,"  "tomorrow,"  hy- 
phen to  be  omitted  with,  119,  204. 

Totals,  columns  of,  in  tables,  sometimes 
in  distinctive  type,  241. 

Town  and  state,  names  of,  in  date  line, 
how  to  set,  50. 

Tracts,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

Transactions  (of  societies),  titles  of:  capi- 
talization of  principal  words  in,  41; 
to  be  italicized,  60. 

Transition,  use  of  dash  to  indicate,  166. 

Translation:  of  names  of  foreign  institu- 
tions, 11,59;  °f  foreign  words  or  phrases, 
78. 

Treaties,  capitalization  of  names  of,  18. 

Treatises,  titles  of:  capitalization  of  prin- 
cipal words  in,  41;  to  be  italicized,  60. 

"Tri-"  compounds  with,  197. 

Tribes,  races,  and  peoples,  capitalization 
of  names  and  epithets  of,  47. 

Trinity,  Christian,  capitalization  of  names 
of  members  of,  24. 

Two-column  tables,  to  be  set  as  open,  248. 

Two-em  dash:  defined,  261;  illustrated, 
261. 

Two-em  quad,  defined,  261. 

Two-letter  syllables,  avoidance  of,  in 
divisions,  216. 

Type:  different  parts  of  body  of,  ex- 
plained, 256;  names  for  different  sizes 
of,  252;  styles  of,  253-57. 

Typesetting  machines,  293-94. 

Typographical  terms,  explanation  of, 
251-94- 

U,  long,  form  of  indefinite  article  before, 

114. 
"Ultra,"  compounds  with,  209. 


140 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


Umlaut,  indexing  of  names  beginning 
with,  240. 

"Un-"  compounds  with,  205. 

"Under,"  compounds  with,  207. 

Unit,  typographical,  explained,  251;  on 
monotype  machine,  259. 

Units  of  measurement,  abbreviations  for, 
in;  spelled  with  lower-case  initial  let- 
ter, 55. 

"United  States":  when  to  be  spelled  out, 
103;  when  to  be  abbreviated,  103. 

University  of  Chicago:  capitalization  of 
special  terms  dealing  with  organization, 
administration,  and  curricula  of,  40; 
of  titles  of  divisions,  departments,  offi- 
cers, and  courses  and  units  of  study,  in 
official  work  dealing  with,  49. 

Unusual  word  or  phrase,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  77. 

"Van,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  3,  240. 

Verbs:  capitalization  of,  in  titles  of  pub- 
lications, 41;  derived  from  proper 
names,  how  to  treat,  53. 

Verse  or  page,  letter  affixed  to  number  of, 
to  denote  fractional  part:  to  be  set  in 
italic,  66;  spacing  of,  66. 

Versions  of  Bible:  abbreviations  for,  109; 
capitalization  of,  30. 

Verso,  denned,  283. 


Versus  (v.,  vs.),  59,  61. 

"Vice,"  prefixed  to  titles,  how  to  treat,  201. 

Vocative,  "O,"  117. 

"Vol.,"   "chap.,"   "p.,"    etc.,    in   literary 

references:   use  of  numerals  with,  237; 

when  omitted,  237. 
"Von,"  rule  for  treatment  of,  3,  240. 
Vowel:  divide  on,  whenever  possible,  224; 

single,     forming    separate    syllable    in 

middle  of  word,  to  be  put  in  first  line 

in  dividing,  224. 

Weights  and  measures,  metric:  how  to 
designate,  in;  spacing  of,  269. 

"Whereas,"  in  resolutions,  use  of  cap  and 
small  caps  for,  51. 

Wide  spacing,  where  to  avoid,  265. 

Word  or  phrase:  accompanied  by  its  defi- 
nition, to  be  quoted,  76;  to  which 
attention  is  directed,  use  of  quotation 
marks  for,  79. 

Words:  hyphenated,  list  of,  214;  of  more 
than  one  spelling,  how  to  spell,  119. 

"Work,"  compounds  of,  186. 

Works  of  art,  titles  of,  to  be  roman-quoted, 
84. 

"World,"  compounds  of,  192. 

Zoological  terms:  use  of  capitals  in,  46; 
of  italics,  71. 


INDEX  TO  TYPES,  ETC. 


PAGE 

Advertising  Figures 95 

Antique  Greek 49 

Arabic 5° 

Black  Gothic 91 

Body  Type: 

Modern 3-7 

Old  Style 8-15 

Monotype 16-33 

Bold-Face  Italic 87 

Bookman  Old  Style 44~47 

Borders 133-135 

Bradley  Text 103 

Brass  Circles 119 

Caslon  Old  Style 34~37,  52-53 

Caslon  Old  Style  Italic 53 

Century  Expanded 78 

Chaucer  Text 101 

Cheltenham  Bold 65-67 

Cheltenham  Bold  Condensed.  .  .64,  68-69 

Cheltenham  Bold  Italic 70-71 

Cheltenham  Condensed 64 

Cheltenham  Old  Style 60 

Cheltenham  Old  Style  Italic 60-61 

Cheltenham  Wide 62-63 

Clarendon 71 

Cloister  Black 81 

Coat-of-Arms 118 

Condensed  Old  Style 56-57 

Condensed  Title 97 

Copperplate 91 

Gushing  Old  Style 74-75 

Delia  Robbia 72-73 

De  Vinne 82-85 

De  Vinne  Condensed 86-87 

Elzevir  Italic 55 

Engraver's  Bold 77 

Engraver's  Old  English 102 

Ethiopic 50 

Extended  Old  Style 57-58 

French  Old  Style 58-59 

Gothic  Condensed 90 

Greek: 

Antique 49 

Inscription 49 

Person . .  48 


PAGE 
Hebrew 49 

Initials 107-117 

Inscription  Greek 49 

Interchangeable  Gothic 94 

Ionic 71 

Jenson  Old  Style  Italic 87 

Light-Face  Gothic 90 

Lining  Gothic  Condensed 92-93 

Litho  Roman 96 


MacFarland . . 


99 


Miscellaneous  Signs 51 

Modern 3-7 

Monarch 93 

Monotype 16-33 

Nestorian  Syriac 50 

Old  Style 8-15 

Old  Style  Antique 87 

Old  Style  No.  8 54 

Old  Style  Italic  No.  8 55 

Ornaments 120-132 

Packard 80-81 

Paul  Revere 99 

Pontiac ?6~77 

Person  Greek 48 

Post  Old  Style 79 

Priory  Text 104 

Remington  Typewriter 98 

Remington  Typewriter,  New  Model .  .   98 
Remington  Typewriter,   New  Model 
Elite 98 

Scotch  Roman 38-43,  88-89 

Sloping  Gothic 95 

Syriac,  Nestorian 50 

Tiffany  Script 105 

Tiffany  Shaded 106 

Tiffany  Upright 105-106 

Title 97 

Tudor  Black 103 

Wedding  Text 100 

Whittier 91 


141 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN 

FIVE  POINT  NO.   SIXTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have 
felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world' s  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alex- 
ander was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 

[Leaded] 

with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to 
THE  FROZEN  NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NATURAL  LIMITS,  EXCHANGING  THE 

VIRGIN  ORES  OF  SPAIN  FOR  THE  LONG-SOUSHT  SPICES  OF  ARABY  THE  BLEST,  WAS  THEREFORE      1234567890 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had    1234567890 
SIX  POINT  NO.   FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  Far  East,  men  must  nave  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 

[Leaded] 

not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
WAS  HINDERED  BY  HIS  EARLY  DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY 
DIADOCHI  HAD  EACH  FOB  MANY  HARD-FOUGHT  YEARS  1234567890 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  1234567890 
AElOtJ  AE"f6tJ  AEtOtT  AEtotT  AEIOtf  AElOtf  AC$  HHKSST 
AEIOu  A6f6u  AEl6u  AEtou  Afilou  A£16u  AgHN  aeiouael6u  ael&u  a§i6u  a6i6ttael6u 
AEIO U  AM6V  A£ld&  AfitOV  AElOV  A&lOtJ  <?$&$$  Thhsst? 
Gtldu  deioti  belbii  &elOu  aSWil  deidii  dffiBePp^^Jjafdhhkfisi  t'u'j 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MODERN 

SEVEN  POINT  NO.  FIFTY-SEVEN 
[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by 
reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 

[Leaded] 

death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpect- 
edly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of 
a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening 
frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Mace- 
donia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
CENTURY  MIGHT  INDEED  FEEL  UNEASY  AT  THE  RESULT, 

IP  HE  WEBB  NOT,  LIKE  MOST  OF  THE  STOICS,  AN  OPTIMIST      1234567890 

or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  1234567890 
£6f6tf  AElOtt  aeidfi  ftelou  A216V  AElOV  d&ldti  deWu  AC 
AEl6tT  AEIOCr  aeibu  aelou  AElbft  AEIOU  aSibu  delou  ftcfi 
AElOtT  aetoti  aeI6u  A&16G  £ElQV  aeloti, 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN 

EIGHT  POINT  NO.  FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was 
no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by 
the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 

[Leaded] 

of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influ- 
ence of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain 
for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no 
very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it 
and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
THAT  IT  SHOULD  DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  UNEX- 
PECTEDLY, BY  THE  FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  BUT  OF  1234567890 

circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  1234567890 

AEIOU  AEiotf  AMOtf  115  A6tf  6  A  g  ft  C  0  3A6AQ 

AEU  AEftfu  AEIOU  AEOU  AEIOU  AIOU  E  S  0  aeiou  deioii  aei&u  aeidu 

aei6u  ac.eno  aewu  dtldu  aeldu  (telou  aeWii  &$n 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MODERN 

NINE  POINT  NO.  FIFTY-SEVEN 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influ- 
ence of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 

[Leaded] 

Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
OF  THE  EARLY  DIADOCHI  HAD  EACH  FOR  MANY 

HABD-FODGHT  YEARS  ASPIEED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE      1234567890 

successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work        1234567890 

AEIOU  A£i6tr  AEiOt  IfilOtJ  AEiOtr  AEiOt 

AEIOU    AEIOU    AEI60      AE1OO    lEIOU    AEIOU    ACH5KNT 

aeiou  ae*i6u  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aelou  achbknt 
AEIOU  A&IOU  AEldfr  AM6V  AfflOV  A£16U 

aeiou    d6l6d   aelbit    delou    aeiou    aeiou   ac.n 
CHgiKSSSTZZaaccdgiino6oosssuuuuyyzz 
H'H  §  T'  a  e'e  h  h  i  i  f' s   'it  ij,  z    D5<J    &]>p    e  J  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MODERN 

ELEVEN  POINT  NO.  SIXTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 

[Leaded] 

by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  sys- 
tem of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 
It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
NOT  UNLIKE  THAT  OF  ROME;  FOR  THE  CON- 

QUEST  OF  THE  WEST  WOULD  HAVE  BEEN    1234567890 

no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  1234567890 
AEIOU  AliJtOU  AfilOU  AElOt  AfilOtt  AfilOtJ 

AEIOU     AEltfU     AEIOU     AEIOU     AEIOU      AEIOU 

aeiou    &<§i6u    &&16u    aei6u    aeiotl    &6I6u 

AEIOU  AtilOtf  Aitldft  A$16tJ  AMOVAMOV 

deiou    dei6u    aeiou    aeldu    aeiou    deiou    a  $  ft 


hhisstuz 
DS  Dp  00   553*    dp 


8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


OLD  STYLE 

FIVE  POINT  NO.   EIGHTY-THREE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  urand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexan- 
der was  yet  a  youn?  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Alia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 

[Leaded} 

show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his 
sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent 
influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the 
froien  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
CONCEIVED  IT  AND  STRIVEN  FOR  IT  CONSCIOUSLY  HAD  FAILED,  WHO  COULD 

HAVE  IMAGINED  THAT   IT  SHOULD  DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  11*34567890 

unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  *  *345  67690 

SIX  POINT  NO.   EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they 
must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest 

[Leaded] 

of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult 
Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
dered by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  THE  LANDS  AND  NATIONS  ABOUT 

THE  MEDITERRANEAN  SEA,  REACHING  TO  THE  FROZEN  NORTH  AND        123456789° 

the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin        i  2  3  45  67  8  Qo 

g    E    E    ft    Aoi)    E    E    aioii    fteiou    aeio'u    aeiou    g    n 

O    f    aeiou    dtwu    aeu    e    aeiou    f 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 

[Leaded] 

the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 
A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unex- 
pectedly, by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands 
of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by 
SUCH  NATIONAL  QUALITIES  AS  HAD  GAINED  FOR  SPARTA 

PRECEDENCE  AND  RESPECT,  COUPLED  WITH  AGGRES-       1234567890 
sive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening       123  43  67890 
AEIOU  AEiotf  AEt  AE  AElOU  A  C  N  S     AEIOU  AEIOU  AEU 
AE  AEIOU  X?N     aeiou  aeiou  aelou  a<?iou  aeiou  £911  aaceeo  kmsy 
AIO  A£t6 &A£l7£  AEIO U  A$N$    aeiou  deiM  &UM  dtu'  de'idti 


io  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


OLD  STYLE 

NINE  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for 
the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 

[Leaded] 

of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what 
would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his 
early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent 
influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE  LANDS 

AND    NATIONS   ABOUT   THE    MEDITERRANEAN       1234567890 

Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  2234567890 


AEiot)   AEfoO   AEIOU   Ai-u 

aeiou     aeiou     a<§i'6u     aeiou     aelou     aacno     fchkmessty 

AEIOU      El6ft      AEOtj      A£6      A9N 

AIOU    A£fU    AEIOU 

aeid     deioti     aeu     dtidu     aeioii     a$nd 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  II 


OLD  STYLE 

TEN  POINT  NO.   EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 

[Leaded] 

young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hin- 
A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE  LANDS 

AND  NATIONS  ABOUT  THE  MEDITERRA-  I   234567890 

nean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North         1234567  8  Q  O 

AEIOU  AlOlJ  6  EU  AEIOU  gftS  AEIOU  AEi6u  Ei6u  EU 
AEIOU  A£N  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeioti  aeiou  aacfihmrssy 
AEIOU  A£f6&  AEIOU  AEiOti  AEIOU 

aeiou    aewu    aeiou    d'eibu    aeiou 


12  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

OLD  STYLE 

ELEVEN  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in 
the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population, 
in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  com- 
mon language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
AGAINST  THE  ADULT  ROME  OF  THE  THIRD 

CENTURY,  FRESH  FROM   HER  SAMNITE    1234567890 

conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  1234567890 

AEIOU  AElOO  AfetJ  £  AEIOU  A  £  N  s 

AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEi6u  AEIOU  ACN 

ae!5u  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  afio  hkmsy  aau  ac 

AEIOU  E  AEL7  AZ16&  AEIOU  Aftf 

aeiou  deiou  deu  deiou  aeiou  d  d  a  $  o 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  _  13 

OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence 
of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When 
Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
WOULD  HAVE  BEEN  NO  DIFFICULT 

MATTER  TO  ALEXANDER,         I     234567890 

with  all  the  resources  of        1234567890 

AEiioO   A£16C   £0    £  A  g  N 

AEiou  AfiioiJ  £fr  £  A<Sr  aeioii  aelou  aeu  aei6ri 


dtidu  aeu   del6ti  fit 


14  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius 
saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 

[Leadeil 

directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
WHEN  ALEXANDER  WAS  YET  A 

YOUNG  MAN  RETURN-       1234567890 

ing  from  his  conquests   1234567890 

AEIOU    AEIOU    A£u    E   A  0  N 

AEiOu  Afeiot)  AEU  E  A  g  N 

aei'oii     a£iou     aeu     aei'oii     aon  ago 

0    6    A    il  dou   aeu  tu  a      n 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  15 


OLD  STYLE 


EIGHTEEN  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 

[Leaded] 

civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now 
be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law. 
IT  WAS  NOT  THE  FIRST 

TIME  THAT  THIS  1234567890 
grand  prospect  i  2  j  45  6  j  8  q  o 

AEou  A£6u  Eti  £  A  N 


1 6  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

SIX  POINT  NO.  THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army ,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was 
hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought 
years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

(Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging 
the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously 
had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained 
it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained 
for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  secur- 
ing ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Mace- 
donia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century  might 
indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or 
a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the 
world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to 
enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  commerce  with  its 
diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indis- 
putable, even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through 
the  enormous  advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  de- 
struction of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason 
of  favored  situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people  nor  their 
HENCE  IT  RESULTED  THAT  THE  COMMON  PEOPLE  DEGENERATED 

RAPIDLY  INTO  A  VULGAR  MOB,  PURSUING  SOLELY  ITS  MATERIAL  1234567890 

pleasures ,  and  the  dominant  classes,  when  vast  opportunities  of  wealth  1234567890 

AEiOtJ          AEidu          AEIotr          AEIOU          AEIOU          AEloO          C   N    f 

aeloii         aeiou         aeiou         aeiou         aelou         aeiou        c  n  g  N 
Woik         aeiou         aeiou         aeiou         aelou         MM*        g  n 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  17 


MONOTYPE 

SEVEN  POINT  NO.  THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many 

[Leaded] 

hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work 
and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  con- 
ceived it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 
but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of 
securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of 
Philip's  Macedonia  ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
AN  OPTIMIST  OR  A  FATALIST.  THERE  WAS,  NO  DOUBT,  THE 

MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT  PEACE  THROUGHOUT  THE  WORLD,      1234567890 

of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  1234567890 

aeioii        aeiou        aeiou        ae"i6u        aelou        aeK5u        c  ft  6 
aeidu        deidu         aelou        aeiou        aeiou        d&8u        $  n  o  a 


1 8  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT  POINT  NO.   THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  Jaw,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 
work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
ANY  POLITICAL  THINKER  WHO  WITNESSED  THIS 

MIGHTY     OUTCOME     OF    HALF    A    CENTURY    MIGHT        1234567890 

indeed  feel  uneasy  at  tfte  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  m      1234567890 

AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOTJ       C  N   C 

aeloii  aeiou  aeiou  aei6u  aeiou  aeiou  c  fi 
aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  $  n 
TDK  H#H  S$ST  ddhhh  HS  dhst  ksttjs  dhms 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  19 

MONOTYPE 

NINE  POINT  NO.   THIRTY-ONE 

\SoKA\ 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Cornith,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one 
of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man, 
returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome; 
for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 

[Leaded] 

The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult 
Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his 
giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was 
hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each 
for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world 
by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
DROP  ALMOST  SUDDENLY,  UNEXPECTEDLY,  BY  THE 

FORCE,  NOT  OF  GENIUS,  BUT  OF  CIRCUMSTANCES,  1234567890 

into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  1234567890 

AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU       AEIOU        C  N  C 

aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       c  n 
aewu       deiou       aewu        aeioii       aeiou       cuttou      Q  n  Q 
A  HST        dst  HST       dhsti 


20  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

TEN  POINT  NO.   THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  diffi- 
cult matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of 
the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most 
A  WORLD-EMPIRE,  INCLUDING  ALL  THE  LANDS 

AND    NATIONS    ABOUT    THE    MEDITER-       1234567890 

ranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North      i  234567890 

AEIOti      AEIOtJ      AEIOU     AEl6tf      AEIOU      AEIOU      f   £  N 

aeiou     aeiou      aeiou     aeiou      aelou      aei5ii     c  a  n  6 

aeiou     aewu     aeldil     aeiou     aelou      aeidu  Q  $  a  n  o 

D  HH  SS  T  K 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  21 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN  POINT  NO.   THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted 
by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law, 
by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander 
ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOPING 

TO  COMPLETE  HIS  WORK  AND  REGEN-    1234567890 

crate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  1234567890 

AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU     CN   £HST   A 

aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou   aelou   aeiou      c  n  dhst 
aewu    aewu    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou   aewu     Qn£ 
HST     A    dhst 


22  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TWELVE  POINT  NO.  THIRTY-ONE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at 
variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the 
predominance  of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  REPUBLIC.  AND 

IF  THE  REALIZATION  OF   THE    1234567890 

conqueror's  dreams  was  kin-      1234567890 

AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  AEIOU  £  N       £ 

aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    c  n    f  $ 
aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou  dknhhhsst 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  23 


MONOTYPE 

SIX    POINT    NO.    FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all 
the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning 
from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources 
of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with 
his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate 
the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But 
while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed, 
who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly, 
by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a 
people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such 
national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled 
with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia  ? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most 
of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest 
gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of 
disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will; 
there  was  the  consequent  development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffusion, 
not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were 
indisputable,  even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being  established, 
NOT  MERELY  THROUGH  ENORMOUS  ADVANTAGES  INSEPARA- 
BLE FROM  ROMAN  INFLUENCE,  BUT  BY  THE  JEALOUS  1234567890 
destruction  of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  1234^67890 

aeioii       aeioil       aeioii       aeioa       aelou       ae"i6ti       c  aft  u    a 

detdu        aeioii        delou        aelou        d&idti        f  &  fi  o 


24  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

SEVEN  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language, 
in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of 
Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler 
republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard- 
fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his 

[Leaded] 

work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and 
respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever- 
widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's 
Macedonia  ? 
OF  THE  STOICS,  AN  OPTIMIST  OR  A  FATALIST.  THERE 

WAS,  NO  DOUBT,  THE  MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT          1234567890 

peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of      1234567890 

aelou      agiou      aeiou      ae!6u      deiou      aelou      c  a  fi  o 
aelou      &ti6u      deiou      fteiou      deidu      aeiou      Q  a  n  d 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  25 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT  POINT  NO.   EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of 
the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance, 
or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  tradition,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the 

[Leaded] 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be 
his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven 
for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it 
IT,  NOT  BY  THE  DIRECTION  OF  AN  ALEXANDER,  BUT 

BY  SUCH  NATIONAL  QUALITIES  AS  HAD   GAINED      1234567890 

for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with    1234567890 

aeioii        aeiou       aei6u        &e"i6u        aeiou        g  a  n  6 
aeiou        aeioii        delbii        deiou        deiou        fdno 


26  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

NINE  POINT  NO.   EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car- 
thage and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached 
one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto 
at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradition,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of 
one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 

[Leaded] 

under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army, 
against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her 
Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the 
conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  .of 
the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired 
to  be  his  whole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about 
the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the 
OF  AN  ALEXANDER,  BUT  BY  SUCH  NATIONAL  QUAL- 

ITIES  AS  HAD  GAINED  FOR  SPARTA  PRECE-          1234567890 

dence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  1234567890 

aeioii    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aelou    aelSu    c  a  n  6  a 
de'idu    aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aelou     Q  an  d 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  27 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN  POINT  NO.  EIGHT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 

[Leaded] 

East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
QUEROR'S  DREAMS  WAS  HINDERED  BY  HIS 

EARLY  DEATH,  MOST  OF  THE  EARLY          1234567890 

Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-         1234567890 

aeiou    aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aeiou     aeiSii     a  6  a  9  n 
aeiou     aewu    deiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou         z  a  and 


28  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

SIX  POINT  GUSHING  NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth, 
they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common 
language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that 
of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Sam- 
nite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his 
giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if 
the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of 

(Leaded] 

the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole 
successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the 
potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture.  • 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  ex- 
changing the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was 
therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and 
striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances, 
into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics,  an 
optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great  peace 
throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an 
umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will ;  there  was  the  consequent  development  of 
wide  commerce  with  its  diffusion,  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of  enlightenment.  These 
material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  dangerous  monopoly  was  being 
established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous  advantages  inseparable  from 
Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction  of  all  those  commercial  centers 
which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of  favored  situation  or  old  traditions 
of  trade. 

BUT  FAR  MORE   SERIOUS  WAS  THE  PATENT  FACT,  THAT  NEI 

1234567890 

aeiou        aeiou        aeiou        aeiou        aeiou        £ 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  29 


MONOTYPE 

SEVEN  POINT  GUSHING  NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by 
reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 
have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against 
the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And 
if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 

[Leaded] 

death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regen- 
erate the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Medi- 
terranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its 
natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought 
spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination. 
But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had 
failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly, 
unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances,  into  the 
hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and 
respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever- 
widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's 
Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a 
century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most 
of  the  Stoics,  an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest 
gain  of  a  great  peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of 
disputes  by  the  arbitration  of  an  umpire  with  power  1234567890 
TO  ENFORCE  HIS  WILL;  THERE  WAS  THE  CONSEQUENT  DE- 
aeioii  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  aeiou  c 


30  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


MONOTYPE 

EIGHT  POINT  GUSHING  NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as 
very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the 

[Leaded] 

conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the 
early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his 
sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the 
long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild 
imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for 
it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should 
drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but 
of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by 
the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-  1234567890 

OF  WEALTH,  BUT  OF  ENLIGHTENMENT.  THESE  MATERIAL 

aeioii    aei6ft    aeidft    aeidu    aeiou    aeiou    c 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  31 

MONOTYPE 

NINE  POINT  GUSHING  NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of 
a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 

[Leaded] 

army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if 
the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations 
about  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North 
and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits,  1234567890 
EXCHANGING  THE  VIRGIN  ORES  OF  SPAIN  FOR  THE 


aeiou      ieidft      aeioil      aei6u      aeiou      Seiou     c 


32  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

MONOTYPE 

TEN  POINT  GUSHING   NO.   TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history. 
There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations 
hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of 
a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been 
held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young 
man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must 
have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of 
Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 

[Leaded] 

army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if 
the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  1234567890 
LANDS  AND  NATIONS  ABOUT  THE  MEDITER- 

aeioii       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       aeiou       c 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  33 

MONOTYPE 

ELEVEN  POINT  GUSHING  NO.  TWENTY-FIVE 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  tradi- 
tions, would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predom- 
inance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was 

[Leaded] 

yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the 
Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near, 
an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his 
hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small 
army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century, 
fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant 
genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and 
feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  1234567890 
ALL  THE  LAND  AND  NATIONS  ABOUT  THE 

aeiou    aeiou    aeiou    aeiou     aeiou    aeiou    c 


34  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  popula- 
tion, in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will 
of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a 
common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the 
world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in 
the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that 
of  Romej  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 
Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alex- 
ander, with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  repub- 

[Leaded] 

lie.  And  \f  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early 
death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to 
be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural  limits, 
exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest, 
was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and 
striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but  of  circumstances, 
into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the  direction  of  an  Alexander, 
but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect, 
coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers, 
such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
PEACE  THROUGHOUT  THE  WORLD,  OF  THE  REAL  SETTLE- 
MENT OF  DISPUTES  BY  THE  ARBITRATION  OF  AN  1234567890 

umpire  'with  power  to  enforce  his  ivi!!;  there  I2^^.^df8go 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  35 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

TEN  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of 
one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest 
of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 
with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of 

[Leaded] 

Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have 
been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  arma- 
ments, against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  reali- 
zation of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death, 
most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  as- 
pired to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and 
regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-  empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
THE  LONG-SOUGHT  SPICES  OF  ARABY  THE  BLEST, 

WAS  THEREFORE  NO  WILD  IMAGINATION.          I     234567890 

But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it        1234367890 


36  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 


TWELVE  POINT 

[Solid] 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the 
fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any 
doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  vari- 
ance, or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in 
population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions, 
would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

[Leaded] 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect 
had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander 
was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests 
in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the 
conquest  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult 
matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia 
under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
WITH  HIS  GIANT  GENIUS  AND  ARMA- 
MENTS, AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER  1234567890 

and  feebler  republic.     And  if       1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  37 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE 


FOURTEEN  POINT 

[Solid] 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 

[Leaded] 

now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 
When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter 
TO  ALEXANDER,  WITH  ALL  THE 

RESOURCES  OF  ASIA  I    234567890 

under  his  hand.      This        1234567890 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SCOTCH  ROMAN 


[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civil- 
ized nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts 
in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predomi- 
nance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quests in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquests  of  the  West  would  have  been  no  dim- 
cult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the 
successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
•was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many 
hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work 
and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 

[Leaded] 

but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise 
of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides 
of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoics, 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 
tion of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent 
development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffusion  not  only  of  wealth,  but  of 
enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  danger- 
ous monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous  advan- 
tages inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction  of  all 
those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of  favored 
situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people 
NOR  THEIR  RULERS  HAD  RECEIVED  ANY  EDUCATION  TO  FIT  THEM 

FOR  AN  IMPERIAL  POLICY,  MATERIAL  PLEASURES,  AND  THE  1234567890 

dominant  classes,  when  vast  opportunities  of  wealth  12 3 U5  6  7  890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 39 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

EIGHT  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in 
language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held 
forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated, 
as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of 
the  West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all 
the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  suc- 
cesses of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 

[Leaded] 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid 
South  as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for 
the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very 
wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven 
for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should 
drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius,  but 
of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by 
the  direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as 
those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half 
a  century  might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like 
HENCE  IT  RESULTED  THAT  THE  COMMON  PEOPLE 

DEGENERATED  RAPIDLY  INTO  A  VULGAR  MOB  1234567890 

pursuing  solely  its  material  pleasures,  and  the  1234567890 


40  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

TEN   POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory. There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason 
of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people, 
by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East, 
men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West  would 

[Leaded] 

have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus, 
with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would 
have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius 
and  armaments,  against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic. 
And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered 
by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor, 
hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about 
MEDITERRANEAN  SEA,  REACHING  THE  FROZEN 
NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  1234567890 

natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  1234^67890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 41 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

ELEVEN  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of 
Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they 
had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  govern- 
ment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed 
by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system 
of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 

[Leaded] 

East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome ;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with 
aU  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes 
of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome 
of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests, 
show  what  would  have  been  the  successes  of  Alexander, 
with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the  younger 
and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of 
the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years 
ASPIRED  TO  BE  HIS  SOLE  SUCCESSOR,  HOP- 
ING TO  COMPLETE  HIS  WORK  AND  1234567890 

regenerate  the  distracted  world  by         123  4,5  67890 


42  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

SCOTCH  ROMAN 

TWELVE  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the 
influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predomi- 
nance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  pros- 
pect had  been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When 

[Leaded] 

Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not  unlike 
that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the  West 
would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alex- 
ander, with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEEBLER  RE- 
PUBLIC. AND  IF  THE  REALIZA-  1234567890 

tion  of  the  conqueror' s  dreams     1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  43 


SCOTCH  ROMAN 


FOURTEEN  POINT 

[Solid] 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb- 
jus  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cor- 
inth, they  must  have  felt  that  they  had 
reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points 
in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no 
longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  pop- 
ulation, in  government,  in  language,  in 
traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the 
will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of 

[Leaded] 

one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this 
grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a 
young  man,  returning  from  his  con- 
quest in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have 
anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire  not 
MATTER  TO  ALEXANDER,  WIT 
1234567890 


44  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

SIX  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of 
Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning- 
points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the 
civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  distracted  by  reason  of  con- 
trasts in  population,  in  government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be 
directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by 
the  predominance  of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had  been  held  forth 
to  the  world.  "When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from  his 
conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquests  of  the  West  would  have  been  no 
difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand. 
The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the 
third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been 
the  successes  of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against  the 
younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams 
was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each  for 
many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  successor,  hoping  to  complete 
his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of 
Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South  as  its  natural 
limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long-sought  spices  of  Araby 
the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagination.  But  while  those  that  had 
conceived  it  and  striven  for  it  consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined 
that  it  should  drop  almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genius, 

[Leaded] 

but  of  circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
direction  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had  gained  for 
Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive  wars  under  the  guise 
of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as  those  which  mark  the  rapid 
strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia? 

Any  political  thinker  who  witnessed  this  mighty  outcome  of  half  a  century 
might  indeed  feel  uneasy  at  the  result,  if  he  were  not,  like  most  of  the  Stoicst 
an  optimist  or  a  fatalist.  There  was,  no  doubt,  the  manifest  gain  of  a  great 
peace  throughout  the  world,  of  the  real  settlement  of  disputes  by  the  arbitra- 
tion of  an  umpire  with  power  to  enforce  his  will;  there  was  the  consequent 
development  of  wide  commerce,  with  its  diffusion,  not  only  of  •wealth,  but  of 
enlightenment.  These  material  gains  were  indisputable,  even  though  a  dan- 
gerous monopoly  was  being  established,  not  merely  through  the  enormous 
advantages  inseparable  from  Roman  influence,  but  by  the  jealous  destruction 
of  all  those  commercial  centers  which  might  have  rivaled  Rome  by  reason  of 
favored  situation  or  old  traditions  of  trade. 

But  far  more  serious  was  the  patent  fact,  that  neither  the  Roman  people 
nor  their  rulers  had  received  any  education  to  fit  them  for  an  imperial  policy, 
MATERIAL  PLEASURES,  AND  THE  DOMINANT  CLASSES,  WHEN  VAST 
cA  cTVI  Ko  y*  r  1&  tf  1234567890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  45 

BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage 
and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There  was  no  longer 
any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized  nations,  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at 
war,  distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  government, 
in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one 
people,  by  the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  predominance 
of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  prospect  had  been  held  forth  to 
the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  returning  from 
his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very 
near,  an  empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander,  with  all  the 
resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with 
his  small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh 
from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  suc- 
cesses of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments,  against 
the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the  realization  of  the  con- 
queror's dreams  was  hindered  by  his  early  death,  most  of  the  early 
Diadochi  had  each  for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole 

[Leaded] 

successor,  hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the  distracted 
world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic  culture. 

A  world-empire,  including  all  the  lands  and  nations  about  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  reaching  to  the  frozen  North  and  the  torrid  South 
as  its  natural  limits,  exchanging  the  virgin  ores  of  Spain  for  the  long- 
sought  spices  of  Araby  the  Blest,  was  therefore  no  very  wild  imagi- 
nation. But  while  those  that  had  conceived  it  and  striven  for  it 
consciously  had  failed,  who  could  have  imagined  that  it  should  drop 
almost  suddenly,  unexpectedly,  by  the  force,  not  of  genins,  but  of 
circumstances,  into  the  hands  of  a  people  who  attained  it,  not  by  the 
directions  of  an  Alexander,  but  by  such  national  qualities  as  had 
gained  for  Sparta  precedence  and  respect,  coupled  with  aggressive 
wars  under  the  guise  of  securing  ever-widening  frontiers,  such  as 
those  which  mark  the  rapid  strides  of  Philip's  Macedonia  ? 
THE  MANIFEST  GAIN  OF  A  GREAT  PEACE  THROUGHO 
c^  c7H  Kj  r  r  T&  tf  1234567890 


46  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

TEN  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall 
of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great  turning-points  in  the 
world's  history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt  that 
all  the  civilized  nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war, 
distracted  by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in  gov- 
ernment, in  language,  in  traditions,  would  now  be  di- 
rected by  the  will  of  one  people,  by  the  influence  of  one 
system  of  law,  by  the  predominance  of  a  common  lan- 
guage. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand  prospect  had 
been  held  forth  to  the  world.  When  Alexander  was  yet 
a  young  man,  returning  from  his  conquests  in  the  Far 
East,  men  must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an 
empire  not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to  Alexander, 

[Leaded] 

with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under  his  hand.  The 
successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his  small  army,  against  the 
adult  Rome  of  the  third  century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite 
conquests,  show  what  would  have  been  the  successes 
of  Alexander,  with  his  giant  genius  and  armaments, 
against  the  younger  and  feebler  republic.  And  if  the 
realization  of  the  conqueror's  dreams  was  hindered  by 
his  early  death,  most  of  the  early  Diadochi  had  each 
for  many  hard-fought  years  aspired  to  be  his  sole  suc- 
cessor, hoping  to  complete  his  work  and  regenerate  the 
distracted  world  by  the  potent  influence  of  Hellenistic 
NORTH  AND  THE  TORRID  SOUTH  AS  ITS  NAT- 
Rj>  r  r  t&e  tf  1234507890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


47 


BOOKMAN  OLD  STYLE 

TWELVE  POINT 

[Solid] 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must 
have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  history.  There 
was  no  longer  any  doubt  that  all  the  civilized 
nations  hitherto  at  variance,  or  at  war,  dis- 
tracted by  reason  of  contrasts  in  population,  in 
government,  in  language,  in  traditions,  would 
now  be  directed  by  the  will  of  one  people,  by 
the  influence  of  one  system  of  law,  by  the  pre- 
dominance of  a  common  language. 

It  was  not  the  first  time  that  this  grand 
prospect  had  been  held  forth  to  the  world. 

[Leaded] 

When  Alexander  was  yet  a  young  man,  return- 
ing from  his  conquests  in  the  Far  East,  men 
must  have  anticipated,  as  very  near,  an  empire 
not  unlike  that  of  Rome;  for  the  conquest  of  the 
West  would  have  been  no  difficult  matter  to 
Alexander,  with  all  the  resources  of  Asia  under 
his  hand.  The  successes  of  Pyrrhus,  with  his 
small  army,  against  the  adult  Rome  of  the  third 
century,  fresh  from  her  Samnite  conquests,  show 
AGAINST  THE  YOUNGER  AND  FEES 
Rj>  r  y  «8fe  §f  1234567890 


48  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


PORSON  GREEK 

SIX  POINT 

TaSe  Se  /uioc  jravrw?,  e(/»rj,  Kpoccre,  Ae'£ov  niag  airopefaice  TO.  fit  TOV  ev  AeA<£ois 
jpi'ou  •  <roi  yap  6rj  Ae'yerai  TraVv  ye  Teflepawewo'flai  6  'AjroAAwv  *cai  <re  wavTa  eK 
ffonevov  jrpaTTeiv.  *E/3ovAd/*Tj>'  aV,  a>  Kupe,  OUTCO?  ex*"'  '  vui'  5e  irai/ra  Tav 


rrai'v  yap  jrap<£5ofa  Ae'yeis.    'On  irpiToi/  JACV,  e<^»ij,  aficA^aa?,  epwraf  TOJ/  Oebi>  el  TI  eSeo- 
ptT/i',  an-en-etpuiaTji'  avrou  et  fiwvairo  aATj0evei»'. 

EIGHT  POINT 

Td5e  5^  /icot  irdvTWS,  f<t>i),  K/JOt<re,  X^of  TTWS  airo/Stp-QKe  ri  ^K  TOU  ^ 
Ae\0ois  wtjffTfiplov  •  crol  yap  drj  \eyerai  TTO.VV  yc  T€6epairev<rdai  6  ' 
Ko.1  <re  irdvra  tutlvip  ireidbivevov  Trpdrreiv.     'E/3ouX6/i7;j'  Av,  (3  KOpe, 
exety  •    vvv  3£  Travra  rdyaKr/a  ti)0i;s  ^|  «ipx^s  irp&TTWv  TrpoffT)v^x^ 
'Air6\\uvi.     IIuJs  5^;  €077  6  KOpos  •  6l8a<TKf  irdvv  ykp  irapdSo^a 

TEN  POINT 

TaSc  Be  /AOI  iravTto?,  l<^»7,  Kpot<rc,  Xc^ov  TTWS  ttTroySc^KC  TO,  €K 
TOV  ev  AeA<^oTs  xprjarrrjpLOv  •  crol  yap  8rj  Aeyercu  Travv  ye  rf.6f.pa- 
TT€vcrOai  6  'ATToAAov  KCU  (re  Travra  exetVa)  Tret^o/xevov  rrpaTTCtv. 
o/xiyv  av,  oi  Ki5pe,  OVTCOS  l^eiv  •  vvv  8e  iravra  ravavria  ev^vs 
TrpaTTwv  rrpocrrjv^OrjV  TW  'ATroAAwvt.  Ileus  Se;  0  C  Q 

ELEVEN  POINT 

TaSe  Se  /u-ot  7raz/Tft)9,  e^>?;,  K/ootcre,  \el~ov  TT<W?  a.7rol3e/3r)Ke 
TO,  e/c  TOV  ev  AeX^>ot9  xprja-rrjpiov  crol  yap  Srj  \eyercu  irdvv 
ye  redepcnrevcrOai  6  'ATroXXeoz/  /cat  ae  Trdvra  efceivw  ireiQo- 
pevov  TTpdrTetv.  'EySouXo'ft^^  a^,  ^  KO/se,  ouTft)9  t  C  <7 

TWELVE  POINT 

TaSe  8e  ju-ot  Trdvra)*;,  €<j>rj,  Kpottrc,  \4£ov  7ro>5  a?ro- 


€r)K€  ra  €K  TOV  e 
819  Xeyerai  TTCLI/U  ye  TeOepaTrevcrOai  6  'ATrdXXwi^  KCU 

TTpOLTTf.IV. 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


49 


ANTIQUE  GREEK 

EIGHT  POINT 

Td8c  S<  fiot  irdvTws,  t^,  Kpotcre,  X^jov  -rrus  dirop^T)K€  rd  IK  TOV 
ev  At\4>o  Is  XPTIC7"TT1P'OV  '  ^o^  "Y^-P  &*1  Xfycrcu  irdw  -yc  rcOepaircwrdai  6 
'A-n-6\\wv  KCU  ere  irdvra  €K€ivu>  irei.06fi€vov  irpdrrciv.  'Epov\6|XT]v  av,  u 
TWS  «X6lv  *  v^v  ^*  irdvTa  rdvavrta  tv0vs  l|  dp\fjs  irpdrrwy  irpo<r- 
T»  'AiroXXwvi.  II  ws  5^  ;  6^  6  Kvpos'  SCSatrKC*  irdw  -yap 

ELEVEN  POINT 

0l  TTdVTCDS,  C^tl,  Kpot(T€,  \€'|OV  TTCOS  dlTOp€pllK€ 

rd  €K  TOV  cv  A€\<))O  Is  XP<n<rT1lP^ov  *  °"°^  V^P  ^  ^-ycTai 
irdvu  -yc  TcOcpairc-OcrBai  6  '  Air6XXa>v  Kai  cr€  irdiTa  €K€ivco 
irpdTT€tv.  '  EpouXdii-qv  av,  a>  Ki)p€,  OUTCOS 

INSCRIPTION  GREEK 


QPAMMATEY^ANTAKAITHC<t>IAO^EBA^TOY 
HEBREW 

SIX  POINT 

n^  ngrai  nj3Dn  nrib  tb^n®1?  -fW  "137"]?  nb'bo  ^t»pt 
nnb   tn^pi  EBtM  p*j|  bjisrj  noitt  nnpb    : 
•j-ihDT  ngb  aoi^,  D?n  r&w.  :nsrai  njj  nybbf  man*  n^n 


NINE  POINT 


a^  pis  baton  lora  rinpb    :nrn  ^a»  nsr 

•     •  •      V  ^V  A"     :     ~  _i~  '  *~TV  IT*  y"    ;    •  I      *    T  I 

nsbb'  rrau  o^risb  nnb  ; 


•••:          AT    :T       _i- 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


NESTORIAN  SYRIAC 

NINE  POINT 
•'       V  .    V        V     .  .  -    .        "7 

V 


»  '          '      \ 


,^o  l^aUoa  1  *"**  - 


ARABIC 

NINE  POINT 


Liti  $*>,        iJU!  JU  JLJ  jJr 


lit.  *J** 

™       ss's' 


ETHIOPIC 

NINE  POINT 

:  m,*'!  :  X<n>  ;  j&rt-rtii  :  ^n)«(Vn  :  o^ftt  :  H-fr 
U7-C  :  a>hX 
^ft  :  X1H  : 
t  :  A"7.f  t  : 

:  hCfttft  : 


C  :  OJ-Xt  i  HI  ;  AflX  :  hcn>  :  ^^-^1  :  rt-rt*  :  <D\\OD  ; 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNS 


EIGHT  POINT 

x  ±  :  ::-H-±<AD_L^v/^/?-'fo  '  "  tf  s  $  <J  o  e 

NINE  POINT 

X  <  ±  -L  =  :  ::•*/<]]  °  '••'•?  D  AT'  f 


/  /    ||    |    X  0 


ELEVEN  POINT 


m>  n>  q  J 

SEVEN  POINT 

FIVE  POINT  =       +       -      -»-       X       '       '       "      #  TWELVE  POINT 

O       / 


"      % 


f  f  f  J  J    V  V  V  V 


52  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like    1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME   THAT  THE 


TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gr  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY  POINT 


When  thoughtful  3456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thoug  7890 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  53 

CASLON  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 

When  th  1234 
THEFIRST 


CASLON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  1234. 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 


TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


THIRTY  POINT 


WHEN  thoughtfu  3456 


54  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


NO.  8  OLD  STYLE 

TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gre  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thouggoi2 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  th  345 
THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


.55 


NO.  8  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

TWENTY-TWO  POINT 


thoughtful  Gr  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

a. 


When  thoughtful  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO  POINT 


thou  go 1 2 
FIRST  T 


FORTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  t ho  34 5 
THE  FIRST 

ELZEVIR  ITALIC 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  e/f  <D  DA  5\*  ^  12345 


56  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD     12345 

NINE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H  67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  12345 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G     67890 

SIXTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G    1234 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  5678 

TWENTY  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  9012 

TWENTY-TWO  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  3456 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIM  7890 

TWENTY-EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TI  1234 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


57 


CONDENSED  OLD  STYLE 

THIRTY-TWO  POINT 


THE  FIRST  5678 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


THE  FIRS  9012 


FORTY  POINT 


THE  FIR  M56 


EXTENDED  OLD  STYLE 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thought  123 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-TWO  POINT 


When  tho  45 
THE  FIRST  I 


58  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


EXTENDED  OLD  STYLE 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  78 
THE   FIR 


FRENCH  OLD  STYLE 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth  12345 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  OF  CARTHAGE  AND 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH 

SEVEN  POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Garth  12345 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 


WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLY  1234$ 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


59 


FRENCH  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN  POINT 


THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  67890 

SIXTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1234 

TWENTY  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  5678 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  901 


THIRTY  POINT 


THE  FIRST  TI  234 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  56 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


THg  FI   78 


SIXTY  POINT 


TH§    901 


60  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE 

SIX  POINT 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  mu  12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Ca  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  hie  Polybius  saw  the  f  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

AAA  E££E  III  060  000  g  N 

aaaa     eeee     iiii     6665     uufiii     9     n 
CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polubius  taw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  thev  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tb  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  61 

CHELTENHAM  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  THE  GR 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greek  901 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY  POINT 


When  thoughtful  1908 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thought  1 90 


SPECIAL  CHARACTERS — ALL  SIZES 


ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

A    E     6     U     ft 

a   see   tn  dds$   imaa   $   a 


62  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  WIDE 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Co  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 


EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 


TWELVE  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 


FOURTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  lik  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gr  90 1 2 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  63 


CHELTENHAM  WIDE 

THIRTY  POINT 


When  thoughtful  345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  though  678 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thou  90 

THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  tho  1 2 

ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

AAA   ££E   III   00   000   £  N 

aaaa    eee     ii     665     uiiuu    9     n 


64  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  CONDENSED 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Po  12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Gree  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH    12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE    67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC  6789 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO  1  2  3  4 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA  5678 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  9  0 1 2 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  3  4  5  6 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 65 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybiu.  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  F 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  t  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  s  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Po  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

TWENTY-*QUJL  POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  901 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 


66  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

THIRTY  POINT 

When  thoughtf  234 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thoug  567 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-TWO  POINT 


When  thou  89 

THE  FIRST  T 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  th  23 
THE  FIRST 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  67 


CHELTENHAM  BOLD 

SIXTY  POINT 


When  14 

THE  FIR 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


When  5 
THE  FI 


ACCENTED  LETTERS— SDC  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

AAA   ££££  111   606   000  C  ff 

aaaa    eeee    iiii    0600    uuuii         n 


68          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

NINETY-SIX  POINT 

Whe7 


ONE-HTJNDRED-AND-TWENTY  POINT 


ThiO 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-FORTY-FOUR  POINT 


Wil 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 69 

CHELTENHAM  BOLD  CONDENSED 

ONE-HUNDRED-AND-EIGHTY  POINT 


70          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


CHELTENHAM  BOLD  ITALIC 


When  thoughtful  Greek,  like  Polybiu,  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  a  1234S 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  *aw  the  fatt  of  C  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  1234S 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P 12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  S678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 

TWENTY-POUR  POINT 

When  thoughtful  9012 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  71 


CHELTENHAM  BOLD  ITALIC 

THIRTY  POINT 


When  thought  345 

THE  FIRST  TIME 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

When  thou  678 

THE  FIRST  77 

ACCENTED  LETTERS — SIX  TO  TWELVE  POINT 

Add    e    i    Odd     Uuu    ft    n 


CLARENDON 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  an  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL 

NINE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

ELEVEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius.  sa  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO 

SEVEN  POINT  FIGUfeES 

1234567890 
IONIC 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Car  12315 
THE  PIB8T  TIME  THAT  THE  OBAND  FBOSFECT  HAD  B 


72  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

DELLA  ROBBIA 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  SET  FORTH 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  S 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybi  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  li  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  73 


DELLA  ROBBIA 

THIRTY  POINT 


When  thought  3456 

THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thou  789 

THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-TWO  POINT 


When  tho  123 
THE  FIRST  I 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  th  45 

THE  FIRST 


74  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CUSmNG  OLD  STYLE 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Cori  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

SEVEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Garth  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

NINE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Garth  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  H 

ELEVEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  t  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

FOURTEEN  POINT  NO.  ONE 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  s  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  75 


GUSHING  OLD  STYLE 

FOURTEEN  POINT  NO.  TWO 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Pol  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  1 5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  901 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thong  234 
THE  FIRST  TI 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  tho  56 
THE  FIRST 


76  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PONTIAC 

SIX  POINT 

WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they  must  12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Garthag  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  90 1 2 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  77 


PONTIAC 

THIRTY  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greek  3456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thoughtful  G  789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


ENGRAVER'S  BOLD 

SIX  POINT 
NO.  ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  OR  AND  PROSPECT  BAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO   THE    WOR    12348 

NO.    TWO 
THE   FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE    GRAND  PROSPECT   HAD    BEEN    HELD    FORTH    678OO 

NO.  THREE 
THE    FIRST   TIME    THAT    THE    CRA.ND    PROSPECT    HAD     BEEN     12345 

NO.  FOUR 

THE   FIRST   TIME   THAT   THE   GRAND   PROSPECT    6T89O 

NO    FIVE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR  12345 

TWELVE  POINT 
NO.  ONE 

THE    FIRST   TIME   THAT  THE    6T89O 

NO.  TWO 

THE  FIRST  TIME   THA  1234 

NO.  THREE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  56T8 


78  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

CENTURY  EXPANDED 

SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HEL  12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PRO  12345 

ELEVEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  67890 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAN  12345 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  1234 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  5678 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  9012 

THIRTY  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TI  345 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


79 


POST  OLD  STYLE 


WHen  thoughtful  GreeKs  like  Polybius  saw  12345 

THE:  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  GreeKs  liRe  Poly  6789O 
THE,  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR 


When  thoughtful  GreeKs  liK  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  6789O 
THE   FIRST   TIME   THAT  THE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  TH 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoug'  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  THO 

ARACTERS 

o/ 


SPECIAL  CHARACTERS—  AIL  SIZES 


8o  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

PACKARD 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  C  12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 


WKen  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tke  fall  of  Ca  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

WKen  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  tKe  fall  12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 

FOTTRTEEN  POINT 

When  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  s  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

WKen  tKougKtful  Greeks  like  P  1^345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

WKen  tKougKtful  Greek  67890 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


THIRTY  POINT 


When  tKougKtful  G  113 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 81 

PACKARD 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

When  tkougKt  4567 

THE  FIRST  TIM 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


WKen  tko  890 

THE   FIRST 

&$ 


SPECIAL  CHARACTERS— ALL  SIZES 


CLOISTER  BLACK 

TWELVE  POINT 

®Hijen  tfjotisfjtful  (greeks  like  £olpt>  1234567890 


82  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

DEVOTNE 

SK  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly bi us  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  o  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FO 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly  bi  us  saw  the  fall  of  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greek  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  thoughtful  567 
THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY  POINT 


When  though  890 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  83 


DEVINNE 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thou  12 
THE  FIRST  S 


FORTY-TWO  POINT 


When  th  34 
THE  FIRST 


SIXTY  POINT 


When  15 
THE   FI 


84  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DEVINNE 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


Whei6 
THE  F 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  A 


Wh7 

VISE 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  85 


DE  VINNE 

NINETY-SIX  POINT 


Oh  8 
HIM 


ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY  POINT 


Bel 


86  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


DE  VOTNE  CONDENSED 

SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


wnenl 


NINETY-SIX  POINT 


The 


ONTl-HUXDRED-AND-TWENTY  POINT 


His  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


DE  VINNE  CONDENSED 

ONE-HtJNDRED-AND-EIGHTY  POINT 


JENSON  OLD  STYLE  ITALIC 


FORTY-EIGHT    POINT 


THE  thoug  56 

BOLD-FACE  ITALIC 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybiua  saw  the  fall  of  Carth    12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN 

NINE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  6789O 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  FROSPE 

OLD  STYLE  ANTIQUE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  3467 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T 


88  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


SCOTCH  ROMAN 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks   1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


When  thoughtful   5678 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T 


THIRTY  POINT 


When  thought  901 
THE  FIRST  TIM 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


When  thou  456 
THE  FIRST  T 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  89 


SCOTCH  ROMAN 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


When  th  78 

THE  FIRS 


SIXTY   POINT 


When  90 
THE  FT 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


Whel2 
THEF 


90  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


LIGHT-FACE  GOTHIC 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they    12345 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HELD  FORTH  TO 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  67890 
THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HE 

SIX  POINT  COMBINATION  GOTHIC  NO.  ONE  HUNDRED  AND  SIXTY-THREE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORLD  12345 


GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SK  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  th  1 2345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  TH 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthag  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN   HE 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  6789 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRA 

TWENTY-TWO  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  91 


COPPERPLATE 

SDC  POINT 
NO.  ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN    HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WOR  I234S 

NO.  TWO 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT  HAD   BEEN    HELD   FORTH  6789O 

NO.  THREE 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN   H  12345 

NO.  FOUR 

THE    FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  6789O 

TWELVE  POINT 
NO.  ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR   12345 

NO.  TWO 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  6789O 


WfflTTIER 

TWELVE  POINT 
NO. 


THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  12345 

NO.  FOUR 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  6789 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 
NO.  ONE 


THE  FIRST  TIM  1234 

NO.  TWO 

THE  FIRST  T  1678 

BLACK  GOTHIC 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corin  67890 


92  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WORL  1234567890 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  WOR  12345 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  67890 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  12345 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HA  6789 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR  5678 

THIRTY  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  T  90 1 2 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  3456 

FORTY-TWO  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  789 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  93 

LINING  GOTHIC  CONDENSED 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 

THE  FIRST  Tl  123 


SIXTY  POINT 


THE  FIRST  145 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT 


THE  FIRST  6 


MONARCH 

SIXTY  POINT 


When  12 
THE  FIR 


94  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

INTERCHANGEABLE  GOTHIC 

SIX  POINT 

NO.   ONE 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND   PROSPECT   HAD   BEEN    HELD  fOMTH  TO  THK  WORLD     1  234* 

NO.  TWO 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE  67890 

NO.  THREE 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD     12345 

NO.  FOUR 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE  67890 

NO.  FIVE 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE    12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

THE   FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  P  67890 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR    1234 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  567 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE   FIRST  TIM   89 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  3 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  95 

SLOPING  GOTHIC 

SIX  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthagt  and  of  Cor  12346 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  UKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  OF  CARTHAGE  AND  OF  CORIN 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD  FORTH  TO  THE 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Cart  ha  67890 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  FALL  OF  CARTHAGE 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEEN  HELD 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  12345 
WHEN  THOUGHTFUL  GREEKS  LIKE  POLYBIUS  SAW  THE  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  sa  12345 

WHEN   THOUGHTFUL   GREEKS  SAW  THE  FALL   12345 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 


ADVERTISING  FIGURES 

EIGHTEEN  POINT  NO.  ONE 


1    234567890 

EIGHTEEN  POINT  NO.  TWO 

1    234567890 

THIRTY  POINT 

1  234567890 


96  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


LITHO  ROMAN 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  oi  Cart  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 


EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybiua    saw  the    6789O 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polyb  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  P  6789O 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GR 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  1  1234 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  G  5678 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

When  though  9012 
THE  FIRST  TIME 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  97 

TITLE 

NINE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR  12345 

ELEVEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  G  67890 

TWELVE  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  TH  1234 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  5678 

SIXTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  TH  901 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  T  235 

TWENTY  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  567 

TWENTY-TWO  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIM  890 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TI 123 

CONDENSED  TITLE 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  C  1908 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  B 

TEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PR  1908 


98  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 

REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
bius  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt  that 
they  had  reached  one  of  the  great 
turning-points  in  the  world's  his- 
tory* There  was  no  longer  any  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSP 


NEW  MODEL  REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TWELVE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Poly- 
Mus  saw  the  fall  of  Carthage  and 
of  Corinth,  they  must  have  felt 
that  they  had  reached  one  of  the 
great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.   There  was  no  longer  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROS 


NEW  MODEL  ELITE  REMINGTON  TYPEWRITER 

TEN   POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw 
the  fall  of  Carthage  and  of  Corinth,  they 
must  have  felt  that  they  had  reached  one 
of  the  great  turning-points  in  the  world's 
history.  There  was  no  longer  any  doubt 
that  all  the  civilized  nations  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 99 

MAC  FARLAND 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPE 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  t  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPEC 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE   1234 


PAUL  REVERE 

EIGHT  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  Garth  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BEE 
When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  123456 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THA  T  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD  BE 

NINE  POINT 

When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fall  of  12345 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT  HAD 


When  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  the  fa  67890 
THE  FIRST  TIME  THAT  THE  GRAND  PROSPECT 


IPO        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
WEDDING  TEXT 

SIX  POINT 
JKlfen  ^mtgl^nl  <gr**h»  iUw  ^alubh»  »«fa  Op  fall  rf  Carl^.  wto  of  Cormtir,  U,eB      12345 

EIGHT   POINT 

ih,augi|tful  Wrecks  like  $J01ybms  0afo  %  fall  of  Carthage  anb    67890 


eit  tiTcughlfitl  (Creeks  like  ^Jolybtits  safer  the  fall  of    12345 

TWELVE  POINT 

rceks  Ife  ^olglrtua  safo  %    67890 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

dr^efes  like     olhfus  safo  12345 


EIGHTEEN   POINT 
NO.  ONE 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 
NO.  TWO 


6780 


life*    fol    0123 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 
NO.  ONE 


[en  tfymtgljtful  Greeks  Jtta    4557 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


ot  tloullful  Olr^ks  Itk  S90 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  _  101 
CHAUCER  TEXT 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

tMtfo!  (ftrttfo  lite  Polling  sato    12345 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


Ulf  Pole  6789 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


(giw&s  12345 


THIRTY  POINT 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


6789 


<&34 


FORTY-EIGHT   POINT 


102         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ENGRAVER'S  OLD  ENGLISH 


tljoufllitful  (Srrrka  likr  Pnlgbtns  0atntl?*  fall  of  (Tartljage  and  of  QTor  12343 

EIGHT  POINT 

tfpragljtful  (Srr  rku  Itk?  Jloiyhiua  aaht  the 


tfjimglftful  (6rrtks  likr  Pai^bfua  Balo  11)0  fall  12345 

TWELVE  POINT 

Ihou0l)iful  (firrrks  life  Jlolghtus  Ham  67000 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

MJjf  tt  iljougljtM  (grwks  libp  pnlgbtua  1234 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


wt  tijflttgijtftti  (fan  9012 

THIRTY  POINT 

«t  tifiragfjtfitl  345H 

rasn 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  103 

BRADLEY  TEXT 

TEN  POINT 

When  thoughtful  6mk$  like  Polybitis  saw  tbe  fall  of  12345 

TWELVE  POINT 

Often  thoughtful  Greeks  like  Polybius  saw  th  12345 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

Ulben  tbougbtful  GreeKs  like  Pol  12*4 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

aiben  thoughtful  Greek  567$ 

TUDOR  BLACK 

SIX  POINT 

TOIben  tbougbtful  Orccfcs  lite  pol^bius  saw  tbc  fall  of  Cartbage  and  of  Cor  12345 

EIGHT  POINT 

tbouabtf  ul  (3reefi0  like  polvbius  0aw  tbe  fall  67890 


tbouGbtful  6reeft5  lifte  polybius  12345 

TWELVE  POINT 

Mben  tbougbtful  <5reeh$  Hfte  pel?  67890 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

When  tbouobtful  Greeks  1234 

TWENTY  POINT 

When  thoughtful  (5  5678 

THIRTY-SIX  POINT 

TOben  tbou  9012 


104         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
PRIORY  TEXT 

EIGHT  POINT 

Wbtn  tbougbtful  Oreefcs  lihe  polnbms  £att  tbc  fan  of  (Cartfcage  12345 

TEN  POINT 

Wt)tn  tl)0ttg;btf  ul  e5mks  like  polpfaitts  sam  tbe  fail  of  67890 

TWELVE  POINT 

tljougbtful  arrrfes  like  pol^bitts  saU3  tlj  12345 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

tl)oug^tful  ovccns  lifte  polt  6789 

EIGHTEEN  POINT 

tljougljtful  (§reefes  Uk  1234 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 

tfjougjjtful  <&m  5678 

9012 


THttTY  POINT 


THIRTY-SIX   POINT 


tljoug  3456 


SIX  POINT  BLACK  NO.  THIRTEEN 

Hjousfjtful  Greeks  like  ^olnbtus  aato  tfjf  fall  of  Carttiagt  antJ  of  Corint  123*5 


TWELVE  POINT  ENGLISH 


tf)ous|)tful  (Srrefes  itfee 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  105 

TIFFANY  SCRIPT 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

Meaatfi/ y^ek  Me   Sfau&u*  Sa 
ff    '  ff 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 

^  tow  tie  67890 

TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 


Ue  J2345 


THIRTY  POINT 


mciMmt/itt  ^/weeKb  tine  67890 
0    / 


TIFFANY  UPRIGHT 

TWELVE  POINT 

ivl  {«e    iatl  OIL   C-aoinaa«     423-Y5 

FOURTEEN  POINT 

0-0        £&  0    0*  •»      J  f         ^7    PP        /?    /^      /*-vor\r* 

tike    c/ctubiuA    AaW    ihe    jail    of    L     67890 
EIGHTEEN  POINT 


io6         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


TIFFANY  UPRIGHT 


°iau 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 
NO.  ONE 


M 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 
NO.  TWO 


THIRTY  POINT 


5678 


9042 


3-V56 


TIFFANY  SHADED 

FOURTEEN  POINT 


12345 


EIGHTEEN  POINT 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 
NO.  ONE 


Me 


TWENTY-FOUR  POINT 
NO.  TWO 


67890 


67890 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


107 


INITIALS 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT  BURFORD 


io8         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
INITIALS 

SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  BURFORD 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


109 


INITIALS 

SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  BTOFORD 


FORTY-EIGHT  POINT  BELLA  ROBBIA 


no         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
INITIALS 

FORTY-EIGHT  POINT  DELLA  ROBBIA 


SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  DELLA  ROBBIA 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


in 


INITIALS 

SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  DELLA  ROBBIA 


H2         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 

SEVENTY-TWO  POINT  DELLA  ROBBIA 


SIXTY  POINT  ROYCROFT 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


INITIALS 

SIXTY  POINT  ROYCROFT 


H4          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 

THIRTY   POINT  JENSON 


MISCELLANEOUS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


INITIALS 


MISCELLANEOUS 


o 


10 


Ii6         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


INITIALS 

MISCELLAKEOUS 


13 


17 


16 


19 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  117 


INITIALS 

MISCELLANEOUS 


23 


H 


24 


Ii8         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  COAT-OF-ARMS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


119 


BRASS  CIRCLES 


120         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE  121 


ORNAMENTS 


28 


122          THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


123 


ORNAMENTS 


124         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


52 


53 


54 


55 


56 


57 


58 


59 


60 


65 


67 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


125 


ORNAMENTS 


* 


68 


70  71  72  73 

POST 


k«V    Ji 

74   75 


76  77 

POST 


78  79  80  81  82 

JENSON 


92   93  S* 


89  90 


•        B 

96        97 


99          100         101         102          103          104          105 


D 


106      107     108      109      110      111      112      113 


129 


128 


127 


126      125 


I25        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


130 


131 


132 


133 


134 


135 


136 


137 


138 


139 


140 


141 


142 


143  144  145 


146  147  148  149  150  151 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


127 


ORNAMENTS 


152 


155 


156 


I28        THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


159 


158 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


129 


ORNAMENTS 


164     165     166      167     168 


169       170     171       172 


173       174     175       176 


160 


179 


180 


130         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


ORNAMENTS 


181 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


ORNAMENTS 


191 


132         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
ORNAMENTS 


196 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


133 


BORDERS 


SIX  POINT 
NO.  ONE 


NO.  THREE 

«^^^, 

NO.  FOUR. 

NO.  FIVE 

NO.  FIVE  A 

NO.  FIVE  B 

iOII!!!ll!lll!!!!ll!lllll!!!llll!!!lllll!!!!!lllllll!lllllll!lllli 

NO.  FIVE  C 
NO.  FIVE  D 

•*<^o<. 

EIGHT  POINT 
NO.   SIX 

*++i 

NO.  SIX  A 


TEN  POINT 
NO.  SEVEN 


TWELVE  POINT 
NO.  EIGHT 


NO.  ELEVEN 


ygyggyy^^ 


134         THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 


BORDERS 


TWELVE  POINT 
NO.  TWELVE 


NO.  THIRTEEN 


NO.   FOURTEEN 

ili  ^XLjIXiL  tZt  xTi  t  •  1  1  •*>  t  •  j  tY  1  4*T  1  1  •  1  1  •  & 

%Ir  ^Ir  TIr    ^Xr     w     %if       w     \fc^  Niir    Vmr     \Tr      w^ 

NO.   FIFTEEN 

\f 


NO.  SEVENTEEN  A 


NO.  SEVENTEEN  B 


NO.    NINETEEN 


NO.   TWENTY 


NO.   TWENTY  A 


iiillliiiillllllllllilllllilljffl 


SPECIMENS  OF  TYPES  IN  USE 


135 


BORDERS 

THIRTY  POINT 
NO.  TWENTY-ONE 


******** 


THIRTY-SIX  POINT 
NO.  TWENTY-TWO 


NO.  TWENTY-THREE 


NO.  TWENTY-FOUR 


NO.  TWENTY-FOUR  A 


SS^FSC 


FO.RTY-EIGHT  POINT 
NO.  TWENTY-FIVE 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


MAR  3  1  1963 


LD  21-50wi-6,'60 
(B1321slO)476 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


